hearbe is like Samper but yellow of colour hath berries like Goose berries but nothing in them The Portingalles call it Sargasso because it is like the herbes that groweth in their welles in Portingall called Sargasso wherevpon that sea is called Sargasso It is not knowne from whence it commeth for there is no land nor Island that is knowne to bee neare that sea but the coast of Africa which is at the least more then 400. miles from thence It is thought it commeth from from the ground and yet there is no ground in that place to bee founde and in sayling to India the shippes come not into that sea for then they kéepe closer to the shore so that it is not once séene and it is not found in any place but there beginning at 20. degrées continuing to 34. degrées so thicke and so full as if they were whole Islandes most strange to beholde In that countrey it is as cold in winter as it is here with vs when it fréezeth not which the Portingalles estéeme a great cold and cloath themselues against it as we doe in a mightie great frost The last of Iune wee were vnder 23. degrees being right vnder the Sunne for y t the Sun was then in the same height and we also vnder y e Tropike of Cancer which is the furthest part that the Sunne goeth Northwarde and then it turneth againe vnto the Equinoctial line and from thence into the South Wee passed y e line of Tropicus Capricorni twice once on the South side by the ende of the Island of S. Laurence and then againe vnder 23. degrées after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza The 2. of Iuly wee were vnder the height of the Islands of Canarie which lie vnder 28. and 29. degrées and are distant from the coast of Barbarie and Africa from 30. to 80. miles which Islandes lay on our right hande and because in those Islandes there are many things that are worthie the noting therefore I thought it conuenient to make a briefe description of them The 96. Chapter A briefe description of the Islands of Canaria THe Islandes of Canaria are seuen which in times past were called the Fortunadas and at this day by the Spaniards are called the Canaries by reason of the great numbers of dogges which they founde in them when they were first discouered The names of the Islands are great Canarie Teneriffe La Palma La Gomera El'Hierro Lansarotte and Fuerte Ventura In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hil called Pico de Terraira which is thought to bee the highest hill that euer was found for it may easily bee séene at the least threescore miles into the sea before they come at it It cannot be climed but in the monthes of Iuly and August for all the other monthes it lyeth full of snowe although below in the Island and in other Islands thereabouts they sée no snow It is thrée dayes iourney to clime vp into it and on the toppe therof it is flat and when it is clear and faire weather a man may from thence sée all the Islandes round about it although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant and as much in compasse The two monthes in which they vse to clime vp vpon the hill they bring downe certaine peeces of brimstone from whence it is much caried into Spaine and at my being in the Island of Tercera a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe gaue me a péece thereof for a remembrance of him In one of those Islandes called Hierro or of Iron there is a wonderfull and strange thing to be séene and I verely thinke it is one of y e strangest things in the world This Island is on of the greatest of all the seuen but it is an vnfruitful and barren land and so drie that in all the Island there is not one droppe of fresh water to bee found but onely in some places vppon the sea side which is farre from hand so that it profiteth the inhabitants but very little But God of his mercie hath prouided for the want of water both for men and beastes in this maner for there is a great trée which no man knoweth for the like is not found in any other place the leaues whereof are small and long and alwaies gréene without chaunging colour this trée is couered and compassed about with a small cloud which alwaies continueth in one forme and neuer altereth nor diminisheth and this cloud casteth dew vpon the leaues of the trée which hang down and drop continually without ceasing a most cleare thinne and fine water which falleth into certaine Cesternes that by the inhabitants of the Island are made round about vnder the trée therein to kéepe and preserue the water The Island of Ascention so called because it was discouered vppon the day of Christs ascention into heauen is not inhabited because of the vnfruitfulnes therof because it wanteth fresh water which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships for that they hope for no refreshing in the same The hilles of this Iland are redde like Bolus About this Iland are many birds because of the great numbers of fishes that are about it specially small flying fishes which in Portingall are called Pisce Bolodor Reade more hereof in the booke in Folio 175. And this water is in so great abundance that it serueth all the Island for their necessarie vses not onely for the people but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle and no man can remember when that wonder first began On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant there is yet an other wonder to be noted which is that oftentimes there is an Islande séene thereaboutes called San Borondon where diuers men haue been on lande being onely such as fell vppon it on the sodaine and not looking for it who affirme it to bee a very fayre pleasant and gréene Countrey full of trées and all kinds of victuaile and that it is inhabited by people that are Christians but no man knowes of what nation they are neyther what language they speake The Spaniards of the Islandes of Canaria haue many times sayled towardes it to view it but they could neuer find it whereupon there goeth diuers opinions of it for some think it to be inchanted and that it may not bee seene but vppon certaine dayes some thinke it to bee very small and alwaies couered with cloudes and that therefore it can not bee séene nor founde out and also the great stormes and strength of the water driueth the shippes from it but to conclude it is holden for a truth that the Ilande lyeth thereaboutes as all those that come from thence doe certainly affirme The Ilandes of Canaria are very fruitfull and plentifull of all thinges both victuailes and other necessaries They haue of all kinds of corne specially excellent good Wine which from thence is caried into
great wood in a very vnwholesome place specially in winter time by reason of the greate heate and moystnesse of the earth as also because of the moorish ground that lieth on the west side of the towne whereby many of the Indians die the houses are built after the Spanish maner as also those of Panama wherein many Merchants dwel that sell their wares by the great the rest of the houses are for strangers like Innes as also for Grocers handicraftsmen and such like most part of the merchants of Nombre de Dios haue houses likewise in Panama for that the traffique out of Peru commeth to Panama and out of Spaine to Nombre de Dios and there they are continually resident vntill they become rich and then they goe to other places or else returne into Spaine On the north side of this towne lieth the hauen wherein many ships may aâ—ker touching such fruits as they bring 〈◊〉 of Spaine into those countries there gâ—â—â—eth some in that vntemperate and vnâ—some ayre as lemons oranges re 〈…〉 hes coleworts and lettuce but very small few not very good other victuals are brought thither out of Hispaniola Cuba and the prouince of Nicaragua as India wheat or maiz bread called Cazabâ— salt fish hogges batatas and from Panama kine and flesh vnsalted all other kind of wares are broght out of Spaine thither for that euery yeere there commeth shippes out of Spaine laden with wine meale bread bisket oliues oile figs reasins silks woollen and linnen cloth and such wares necessary for the sustenance of man which wares being arriued in that country are carried in little scutes through the riuer Chiara to a place called Ciuâ—ce fifteene miles distant from Panama where it is deliuered to a Spanish Factor which registreth all the wares and kéepeth them vntill they be carried by beasts vnto Panama a Towne lying on the other side of the Lake from whence by ships they are conueyed into other places thorow the whole country of Peâ—â— Câ—aâ—câ—s and Chila as also northward in the out places of the Spaniards The breadth of the country betweene Nâ—mbre de Dioâ— and Panama from the one side to the other is not aboue seuenteene miles whereby Peru is no Island The Spaniards compare this towne to Venice but I think they nere saw it for if they had doubtles they would be of another opinion But letting Panamâ— rest til another time I will proceede with the description of the coast from Nombre de Dios to Farallones del Darien lying vnder eight degrées are seuentie miles touching the towne of Dariene til you come to the old virgine Mary it heth in an vnwholesome place therefore all the inhabitants are of a pale yellow collour like those that haue the yellow iandise yet it proceedeth not from the nature of the land for that in places of the same height there is wholsome dwelling that is where they haue fresh water and cleere fountains and where vnder the same height they dwel vpon hilles and not as Dariene which lieth in a valley the sides of the riuer being compassed with high hilles and by that means they haue the sunne but at noone time only right ouer them and on both sides both before and behinde they are no lesse troubled with the reflexion of the sunne beams causing a most vnsupportable heat in such sort that the dwelling in Dariene is not hurtful by reason of the nature of the land but because of the situation thereof it is likewise deadly by reason of the moorishnesse of the ground beeing wholly compassed about with moorish stincking water the Towne it selfe being a very pitte or moorish plotte of ground and when they throwe water vpon the floores of their houses it doth presently ingender toades and when they do digge but a spanne and a halfe deepe in the earth presently there appeareth Adders out of the poysoned water that are within the filthy earth of the riuer which floweth with filth and full of durt Out of this deepe valley euen vnto the sea in Dariene are Tygars Lions and Crocadiles Oxen Hogges and Horses in great abundaunce and greater than those that are brought thither out of Spaine many great trees and fruit and all kindes of fruits and hearbs that are to be eaten the people are of colour betweene darke and red yellow of good proportion with little haire or beardes onely vpon the head and the eie-browes specially the women which with a certaine hearb make it fall off they goe all naked specially vpon their heades they haue their members hidden eyther in a shell or in a case or else they couer it with a cotten linnen the women are couered from the middle to the knees all the rest is naked and bare in that countrey there is no winter for that the mouth of the riuer Dariene lieth lesse than eight degrees from the equinoctiall so that day and night is there of a length from the furthest point that reacheth into the sea lieth a village in the Prouince of Caribana nine miles from Dariene called Futeraca and from thence about three miles lieth Vraba wherof the whole stream hath her name and in time past was the chiefe Towne of the kingdome sixe miles off lieth Feâ— from thence to Zereme are 9. miles from Zereme to Sorache are twelue miles These places were all full of Camballes and when they had no ennemies to fight withall they fought one against the other that they might deuoure the men The gulfe of Vraba is 14. miles long and in the entrie sixe miles broade and the nearer it runneth to the firme land the narrower it is into this riuer runne many waters and one that is muche more prosperous then the Riuer Nilus whatsoeuer is sowed or planted in Vraba it springeth very speedily for that within 28. daies they haue ripe Cucumbers Goardes Melons c. In Dariene and Vraba there groweth much fruit that is verie pleasant and sweete of taste much aboue our fruits whereof whosoeuer is desirous to know more let him reade the histories thereof as Peter Martir in his ninth book of the descriptioÌ„ of the firme land In the mouth of the gulfe of Vraba lyeth a small Island called Tortuga that is the Island of Torteaux because it is formed like a Torteaux or because there are many Torteauxes therein and further on the same coast lyeth the Island l. Fuerte which is in the middle betweene Vraba and Carthago wherein also are Canibals most cruell villaines and from thence you come to Puerto de Caribana the hauen of Caribana or of Cambals whereof the Caribes haue receiued their name From thence you come to the riuer de Guerra and then to the riuer of Zenu which is a great hauen the town being about seuen or eight spanish miles and a half from the sea wherin is great traffike of fish fine gold siluer works They gather gold out of the riuers in great floods rains placing great nettes in the
lie to catch fish about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande where on the loofe side the ships may harber it is called Chulâ— from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles it lyeth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Reâ—es to Arequipa DEparting from Lyma and following the coast about three spanish miles or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama in our card Pachamma a most pleasant place and wel known among the Peruuians because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein for riches exceeding al others in that countrey being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth in the which temple were many painted doores wals with formes of wilde beasts in the middle therof where the idoll stood were the priests that shewed themselues to be verie holie and when they offered sacrifice for all the people they turned their faces towardes the gates of the temple and their backs to the Image casting downe their eyes and ful of fearefull demonstrations made great stamping as some of the old Indians say like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo when the people staied to heare the prophesies Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their demaunds and what he sayd they beleeued in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden and the priestes were greatly esteemed the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaundements rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried about that Church but onely their kings noblemen and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage bringing certaine offerings with them when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare there assembled many people that according to their manner plaied on instruments when the kings of Casco subdued the vallie they hauing a custome throughout al their countries to erect temples in the honour of the sunne and beholding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place as also the great deuotion vsed therein they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church but appoynted another to be made by it in honour of the sunne which shuld be esteemed the greater which according to the kings commandement being finished be indowed it with great gifts sending thither certaine women wherwith the diuell of Pachacanâ—a was verie well pleased as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them being serued as well in the one temple as in the other and keeping the poore soules vnder his power and now although this temple is defaced yet hee ceaseth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one thereby to keepe them in obedience vnto him and not to become christians In steede of those Idols there are crosses erected as they think to please the diuel the name of the diuell was Creator of the world for Camac is creator and Pacha world but God permitting Francis Pizaâ—ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple and to take away the treasure although the priestes before his comming had hidden part thereof which could neuer be founde yet a great part was carried away This vallie is verie fruitful rich and ful of trees abounding with kine and other cattel as also good horses From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca where there is a notable thing to be noted for the strangenesse thereof for it neuer raineth there neither is there any riuer whereby they may conuay the water therwith to water their groundes yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate with fruitfull trees the meanes they haue to helpe themselues therein is thus that they make certaine deepe pits within the earth wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire as also the smal dew and moisture that falleth God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things but no other corne neither would that likewise grow therein if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne which fish they take with nets in the sea and by that meanes it groweth in great aboundance whereby the people maintain themselues The water that they vse to drinke they take it out of great deepe pittes and for the better prouision of their corne they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede both to eate and sowe theyr corne There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition belonging to the King of Peru therein to lodge and rest themselues when they trauaile through their countryes Two miles and a quarter from Ciâ—ca is the prouince of Mala where there runneth a faire riuer the coast whereof is ful of trees and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco well knowne in that countrey being great and broade and ful of fruitful trees speciallie of Guuyas a certaine Indian fruit verie pleasant of smel and taste and also Guauas and Maiz in most great aboundance with al other things as wel Indian as Spanish fruites Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons Turtle Doues and other kindes of foules in the woods and wilde countrey which make a good shadow in the vallie vnder the which there runneth certaine streames of fresh water The inhabitants of this country say that in times past that place was verie populous and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils and ouer plaine countries and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them they held wars against him for foure yeares together minding not to loose the liberty which their predecessors before them had so long maintained During the which wars many strange things happened which are herein needlesse to rehearse because my meaning is not to make a History but onely to describe the coast and although the Kings of Peru in summer time because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built whether he and his nobilitie repaired giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco when he had subdued that people the saide residence of the King and the towne did both decay yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle which he left in signe of victory situate
and when you begin to come neere them theÌ„ you shall keep towards Pedra BraÌ„ca and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes for two causes the one because the windes at that tyme when you sayle to China doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest and if the winde should scant and fall into the Southeast as often tymes in those countries it happeneth being on the syde of the Ilandes you could not passe by the Riffes whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca and the Ilandes or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there and that the Monson that is the tyme of your voyage to China would bee spent the other is that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde or with few sailes spred then the streames would driue you vpoÌ„ the Riffes before you could auoyde them as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses whose Pilot was Goâ—â—alo Vieâ—a who by the water was driueÌ„ vpoÌ„ 10. fadome where he ankered and then after he came to 7. fadom where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca or the white cliffes aforesaid FroÌ„ Pedra Branca to the IlaÌ„d Pulo Tâ—nge y t run north south north by east south and by west the course is 13. miles this IlaÌ„d is high and rouÌ„d hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées it lieth by the coast of the firm land betwéene it y e firm land there is good sayling but it is not Oorbaer this IlaÌ„d lieth with Pulo TimoÌ„ northeast southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pulo Tinge you shall take your course from Pedra Branca a great myle Eastward and from thence North and north and by East alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes being at 14 fadome being as you gesse in that country you shal presently kéepe off from it into the sea being before it you néed not feare any thing but y t you sée before your eyes in this course to Pulo Tinge in the sight of the Iland there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands which shal lie on the land side froÌ„ you and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon the IlaÌ„d of Pulo Timon is great high and on the side whereunto you sayl are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes ankers because in those countries they vse such kind of wooddeÌ„ ankers and it is commonly couered with mistes clouds and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground therein are 2 places wher you find good fresh water one being on the side of the land in the middle of a long strand a little inward to the land where you find a good réed but wheÌ„ you come early thereunto as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly it is dangerous to anker there because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place where you likewise find fresh water on the East side towards the sea ruÌ„ning right vpon the face of the Iland along by the East side and being past a certain houel that maketh a hooke you shal find a sandy Bay where you must enter into the land and when the point or hooke lieth southeast you may anker where you may lie for the Momson and there you shal haue 20 fadome déepe there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish and in the same bay there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea also on that syde you haue much better wood néerer to fetch there you ly safe from west winds on that side of the land you haue certain IlaÌ„ds along the coast from the north point of this IlaÌ„d Pulo TimoÌ„ about the shot of a great péece there lieth an other Iland and by the South point an other likewise about 3 miles south eastward ther lieth 3 other Ilands wherof y e one is great rouÌ„d y e other 2 being somwhat smaller are called Pulo Laor the Iland of Pulo TimoÌ„ lieth vnder 2 degr â…” on y e north side of the Equinoctial 12 miles northwest ward stroÌ„ it lieth the riuer Pan in the firme land ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward there lieth a small Iland hauing an euen round trée in the middle half a mile froÌ„ it it is 6 fadom déep grouÌ„d FroÌ„ Pulo TimoÌ„ to Pulo Condor the course is North northeast Westsouthwest 115 miles Pulo CoÌ„dor lieth vnder 8 degr â…” it is a great IlaÌ„d with high hils hauing close by it 5 or 6 Ilands and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle it is ouer al good grouÌ„d at 10 or 12 fadome déepe and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water it lieth north and south with the riuer of Camboia which is called the hauen of Malaios 12. miles distant but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther for wheÌ„ it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and northwest w t some thunder whereby you may not stay with one sayle only for that being without sayles it would strike you to ground and cast your ship away when it is early in the yeare theÌ„ you haue East winds From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y u shal alwaies find ground at 35 38 fadome and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor you shall sayl north northeast not accounting any winding of the compas for if y u should do so you should run on the south side to seaward and run by without séeing it which is an euill course for that y e winds alwaies in this course doe blow froÌ„ the side of the land and if it chance that before you sée the IlaÌ„d Pulo Condor you find y e water thicke troubled foule then cast out your lead you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water with a soft muddy ground so runne half a strike in that course til you come to 17 fadome and being there then rune northeast and being at 1 1 6 fadome before you sée the Iland theÌ„ hold your course East East and by north alwaies at 16 fadome déepe whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor full of bushes a mile or thereabouts distant from each other and if it be possible you shall
a great number of whale fishes and other fish by the Spaniards Atun whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in Spaigne as also Albacoras and Bonitos which are all Fishes which commonly kéepe in Channels straights and running waters there to disperse their séed when they bréed which maketh me more assuredly beléeue that thereabouts is a Channell or Straight to passe through Being by the same course vpon y e coast of new Spaigne vnder seuen and thirty degrées and ½ wee passed by a very high and faire land with many Trées wholy without Snow and foure miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots leaues of Trées Réedes and other leaues like Figge leaues the like whereof wee found in great abundance in the countrey of Iapon which they eat and some of those that wée found I caused to be sodden with flesh and being sodden they eat like Colewortes there likewise wee found great store of Sea wolues which wee call Sea dogges whereby it is to bée presumed and certainly to bee beléeued that there are manye Riuers Bayes and Hauens along by those coasts to the Hauen of Acapulco From thence wee ranne South-east Southeast and by South and South-east and by East as we found the wind to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia on the Northwest side lying vnder two and twenty degrées being fiue hundred myles distant from the Cape De mendosino In this way of the aforesaied fiue hundred myles along by the coast are manye Islands and although they bee but small yet without doubt there are in them some good Hauens as also in the Firme Land where you haue these Hauens following nowe lately found out as that of the Island of Saint Augustine lying vnder thirtye degrées and ¾ and the Island called Ilha de Sedros scarce vnder eight and twentie degrées and ¼ and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martyn vnder thrée and twentie degrées and ½ all this coast and Country as I thinke is inhabited and sheweth to bee a verye good Countrey for there by night wee sawe fire and by day smoake which is a most sure token that they are inhabited From the Point or hooke of Saint Lucas to the South-east side of Calliffornia wee helde our course East Southeast for the space of eightye myles to the point called El cabo de las corrientes that is the point of the streames lying vnder ninteene degrées â…” and running this course Northward about a mile from vs we sawe thrée Islands called las tres Marias that is the thrée Maries running the same course About foure miles from the other Islandes there are other Islands reaching about 2. or thrée miles All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles there are great streames that runne Westward From the point or Cape de las Corrientes wée ranne Southeast and sometimes Southeast and by East for the space of an hundred and thirtie miles to the hauen of Acapulco In this way of an hundred and thirty miles being 20. miles on the way we had the Hauen of the Naâ—iuidade that is the birth of the Virgine Mary and other eight miles further the Hauen of Saint Iago or Saint Iames and sixe miles further the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma that is the Strand of Culyma All this coast from California to the Hauen of Acapulco is inhabited by people that haue peace and traffique with the Spaniards and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other places of new Spaine The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage ALl this Description and Nauigation haue I my selfe séene prooued and well noted in my Voiage made and ended in the yéere of our Lord 1584. from great China out of the Hauen and riuer of Canton as I will more at large set it downe vnto your honour with the Paralell and Meridian thereof as God shall permit me time and leysour whome I beséech to send you long and happy daies and the same haue I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Originall coppie that was sent vnto the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies The 55. Chapter The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da Silua for the Viceroy of new Spaine the 20. of May in the yeere of our Lorde 1579. to the towne of Mexico from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies wherein is set downe the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that tooke the aforesaid Nuno da Silua by the Islands of Cabo Verde and carried him along with him thorough the Straightes of Magellanes to the Hauen of Guatulco in newe Spaine where he let him goe againe NVno da Silua borne in Porto a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia saith that hée departed out of his house in the beginning of Nouember in the yéere of our Lorde 1577. taking his course to Cabo Verde or the gréene point where hée ankered with his shippe close by the Hauen of the Island of Saint Iames one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid béeing the nintéenth of Ianuarie in the yéere of our Lorde 1578. and lying there there came sixe shippes which seemed to be English men whereof the Admirall boorded his shippe and by force with his men hée tooke him out of his shippe bringing him in the boat aboord the Admirals shippe leauing some of his best men aboord his shippe and although the fortresse of the Island shot foure or fiue times at them yet they hurt not the English men who hauing done seâ— saile from thence to the Island of Braua that is the wild Island taking with them the shippe of the saide Nuno da Silua béeing there they filled certaine vessels with fresh water from thence holding their course inwarde to Sea hauing first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas shippe on lande onley kéeping Nuno da Silua in his shippe as also his shippe with the wines that were therein and Nuno da Silua saith the cause why they kept him on boorde was because they knewe him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia that hée might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water Béeing put off from the Island of Braua they helde their course to the lande of Brasilia which they descried vpon the first of Aprill vnder the height of 30. degrées and without landing or taking in fresh water they held on their course to the riuer Rio de la Plata that is the riuer of Siluer lying vnder fiue and thirtie degrées little more or lesse where they went on lande and prouided themselues of fresh water From thence they helde on their course till they came vnder nine and thirtie degrées where they ankered and béeing there they left two of their sixe shippes
had made with the laÌ„d about one houre or more wee perceiued land right before vs and were within two miles thereof which by reason of the darke and misty weather we could no sooner perceiue which put vs in great feare for our iudgement was cleane contrarie but the weather beginning to cleare vp we knew the land for it was a part or bank of the point called Cabo Falso which is about fiftéene miles on this side the cape de Bona Speranza towards Mossambique the cape de Bona Speranza lieth vnder 34. degrées southward there wee had a calme and faire weather which continuing about halfe a day in the meane time with our lines we got great store of fishes vppon the same land at ten or twelue fadoms water it is an excellent fish much like to Haddocks the Portingales call them Pescados The twenty of the same month wee met againe with Saint Francisco and spake with her and so kept company together till the 24. of Iune when wee lost her againe The same day wee stroke all our sayles because wee had a contrarie wind and lay two dayes still driuing vp and downe not to loose anie way meane time wee were against the high land of Tarradonaâ—al which beginneth in 32. degrees and endeth in 30. and is distant from Capo de Bona Speranza 150. miles in this place they coÌ„monly vse to takâ— counsell of all the officers of the ship whether it is best for theÌ„ to sayle through within the land of S. Laurenso or without it for that within the land they sayle to Mossambique and from thence to Goa and sayling without it they cannot come at Goa by reason they fal down by meanes of the streame and so must sayle vnto Cochin which lieth 100. miles lower then Goa and as the ships leaue the cape then it is not good to make towards Mossambique because they cannot come in time to Goa by reason of the great calmes that are within the land but they that passe the Cape in the month of Iuly may well goe to Mossambique because they haue time inough there to refresh themselues and to take in fresh water and other victuals and so to lie at anker ten or twelue dayes together but such as passe the cape in the month of August doe come too late and must sayle about towardes Cochin thereby to loose no time yet it is dangerous much more combersome for that commonly they are sicke of swolen legges sore bellies and other diseases The 30. of Iuly wee were against the point of the cape called Das Corentes which are 130. miles distant from Terra Donatal and lieth vnder 24. degrées Southwarde there they begin to passe betwéene the Ilands The Ile Madagascar otherwise called Saint Laurence The Iland of S. Laurenso is by Marcus Paulus named the great Iland of Magastar by Andrea Theuet it is called Madagascar and is the greatest of all the East Ilandes for it is greater in compasse then eyther of the Kingdomes of Castile or Portingale and lieth on the other side of Africa as we passe the cape de Bona Speranza it containeth in length as Theuet describeth 72 degrees and in bredth eleauen degrees and is in coÌ„passe as some hold opinion 3000 Italian miles and as some write 4000. which should bee sixe or eight hundred Dutch miles This Iland is iudged to be very temperate and therefore well peopled but beleeue in Mahomet Marcus Paulus sayeth that the Iland is gouerned by foure ancient men it is full of wilde beasts and strange foules whereof he writeth many fables not worthie the rehearsall This Iland hath Elephants all kind of beasts which haue but one horn wherof one is called an Indian asse with whole feet vncloueÌ„ an other is called Orix with clouen feet it hath many snakes efftes great store of woodes of redde Sandale which are there little esteemed for the great abundance there the Sea yeeldeth much Amber it aboundeth also in Rice Barley Oranges Lemons Citrons Millons which are so great that a man can hardly gripe them both red white yellow and better then ours and much ginger which they eate greene Hony Sugar in such abundance that they know not whether to send it Saffron many medicinable hearbs and Indian nuts It likewise yeeldeth Siluer and hath manie Riuers beautifull Fountaines and diuers Hauens whether many Sarasins Mores doe bring their Marchandise as clothes of gold Siluer Linnen made of cotton wooll and such like From S. Laurenso to Mossambique which lieth from the firme land of Das Corentes 120. miles and is an Iland of 220. miles long stretching north south and in breadth 70. miles beginning from the first point vntill you come at the cape in 26. degrees and endeth in the North in 11. degrées The people of the Iland are blacke like those of Mossambique and goe naked but the haire of their heades is not so much curled as theirs of Mossambique and not full so blacke The Portingales haue no speciall traffique there because there is not much to be had for as yet it is not very well known The 1. of August we passed the flats called os Baixos de Iudea that is the Flats of the Iewes which are distant from the cape das Corentes 30. miles and lie betwéen the Iland of S. Laurence the firme land that is from the Iland fiftie miles and from the firme land seauenty miles which Flats begin vnder 22. degrées and a halfe and continue to twentie one degrées there is great care to bee taken lest men fall vpon them for they are very dangerous and many ships haue bin lost there and of late in Anno 1585. a ship comming from Portingale called S. Iago beeing Admirall of the Fleet and was the same that the first voiage went with vs from Lisbone for vice Admirall as in another place we shall declare The fourth of August we discried the land of Mossambique which is distant from the Flattes of the Iewes nintie miles vnder fifteene degrées southwards The next day we entred into the road of Mossambique and as we entered we espied the foresaid ship called S. Iago which entered with vs and it was not aboue one houre after we had descried it beeing the first time wee had séene it since it left vs at the Iland of Madera where we seperated our selues There wee found likewise two more of our ships Saint Laureâ—zo and Saint Francisco which the day before were come thether with a small ship that was to sayle to Malacca which commonly setteth out of Portingale a month before any of the ships do set sayle for India only because they haue a longer voiage to make yet doe they ordinarily sayle to Mossambique to take in sweete water fresh victuals as their voiage falleth out or their victuals scanteth If they goe not thether theÌ„ they saile about on the back side of y e Iland of saint Laurenso not setting their course for
liuing women burne themselues with their dead husbands what estate the Embassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Goa how he is caried in the stréets also a true description of the Canariin with his wife the manner how the Indian heathenish children are brought vp also of the soldier of Ballagate which is called Lascariin with the heathenish whore called Balliadera who is a dancer because shee is commonly vsed therevnto in any feast or open playes are ready to be hired for a small péece of mony whereof many of theÌ„ dwell in Goa with the maner of the dwellings houses of the Decaniins Canariins Corumbiins how they row in the riuers with their scutes whereby I haue placed the maner of the boats vsed by those of the Malabares in Cochin so that I shall not néede to make a seuerall Chapter of them by themselues The 40. Chapter Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India THere are many Arabians Abexiins in India The Arabians obserue Mahomets law the Abexiins some are Mahometans some christians after their manner for they are of Prester Iohns land which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Aethiopia vnto the red sea and the riuer Nilus in Egypt and by their common traffique and conference with the Moores and Mahometans there are diuers of them infected with the same sect There are many of them in India that are slaues and captiues both meÌ„ and women which are brought thether out of Aethiopia sold like other Oriental Nations the Abexiins that are christians haue on their faces 4. burnt markes in manner of a Crosse one ouer their nose in the middle of the forehead betwéene both their eyes on each of their chéekes one betwéene their eies and their eares and one vnder their neather lip downe to the chin and this is their Baptisme when they are made Christians which they vse in stead of water These Abexiins and Arabians such as are frée doe serue in al India for saylers and sea faring meÌ„ with such marchants as saile from Goa to China Iapon Bengala Mallaca Ormus and all the Oriental coast for that there they haue no other saylers nor there are no other because the Portingalles although they serue for Saylers in the Portingalles shippes that come into India and haue neuer bene other in Portingale but Saylers yet are they ashamed to liue in that order and thinke it a great discredite vnto them together with a great diminishing of their authorities estimations which they account themselues to hold in India so that they giue themselues out for maisters of shippes and by their captaines are also called Pilots and chief Botesonnes but not lower for if they should descend but one step lower it would be a great blot and blemish vnto them all their liues after which they would not indure for anie thing in the world These Abexijns and Arabians serue for small money and being hyred are verie lowlie and subiect so that often times they are beaten and smitten not as slaues but like dogs which they beare very patientlie not once speaking a word they coÌ„monlie haue their wiues and children with them in the shippe wherein they are hyred which continually stay with them what voyage soeuer they make and dresse their owne meat which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it The cause why the women sayle in the ship is for that in Summer and not else their shippes goe to sea wheÌ„ they alwayes haue calme water and faire weather with good windes they haue commonlie but one Portingale or two for Captaine maister and Pilote and they haue a chief Boteson which is an Arabian which they cal Mocadon and he is ruler of the Arabians Aberijns that are saylers whome he hath vnder his subiection euen as if they were his slaues or subiects This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargaine with the owners of the ship to haue so manie saylers and he receiueth the monethlie money for their wages and accounteth with the saylers particularlie but for gouernment of the ship he hath not to doe neither troubleth himselfe therewith The shippes when they sayle vse no caske for water because there is not any throughout all India nor any made there saue onely such as come out of Portingall and vsed in the Portingall shippes but in stéed of pypes they vse a great foure cornered woodden cesterne y t staÌ„deth by the main maste at the very foote therof vpon the keele of the shippe which is verie well pitched and made fast wherein they lade as much water as they thinke will serue them for their voyage The captaine maister or Pilote Marchants and passingers haue euerie man their meat by themselues and their water in great Indian pots called Martauans whereof in y e description of Pegu I haue alreadie spoken These people are so seruiceable and willing to doe any thing that if there chanceth but a hat or any other thing to be blowen ouer or fall into the water they will presently leape cloathes and all into the sea to fetch it again for they swimme like fishes when the ships lie within the hauen or riuer and that they will all goe on land then they goe into the boate and so row to shore which done one of them roweth backe againe with the boate which he tyeth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land and when they will goe abord again if any of the saylers be vnwilling to swimme to fetch the boate they are by the Mocadon or the maister with strokes compelled to doe it but they coÌ„monlie neuer stay till it cometh so â—arre but rather striue who shall be first in the water to shew their diligence and when they doe any thing abord as hayling ropes and other things they sing answere each other very sweetlie so y t it séemeth to be very good Musick Their exercise on land is all the day to drinke and to sit in tipling houses with their wiues and children and then they goe hand in hand through the stréets réeling here and there making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner there womeÌ„ weare breeches like the Arabians and Mahometans The 41. Chapter Of the blacke people of Mosambique which are called Caffares and of their manners and customes THe black people or Caâ—fares of the land of Mosambique and all the coast of Ethiopia and within the laÌ„d to the Cape de bona SperaÌ„za go al naked although those of Mosambique that is the women do a little couer themselues which they do by meanes of the daylie conuersation they haue with the Portingales who for Gold siluer and Iuory bones and such like doe exchange Cotton lynnen brought out of India that within the land and to the cape they vse in those countries otherwise they couer themselues with the like apparell that Adam and Eua did weare in Paradice They are all as black as pitch with curled and singed hayre both on their heads and beards
vsed in India for many medicines caryed into al places Galanga is a roote with many â—nots being red both inwardly outwardly the knottes running about it smelling well and sharpe of taste for sauor and fashion like the Cyperus roote wherefore by some men it is esteemed for Cyperus of Babylon It heateth and dryeth in the third degree therefore it comforteth the stomake and driueth away the payne thereof proceeding of cold and windynesse It healeth a stincking breath it helpeth the beating of the hart being drunk with the iuyce of the leafe of Weghe it healeth the Colicke proceeding from wind it is good also against the windines of the Mother it increaseih lust heateth the kidneyes and euerie morning eating a little therof it healeth the head-ache which hath long indured Of these and such like herbes there are manie in India and in the Orientall parts the names and properties whereof are to mee vnknowne because they are not so common nor knowne among the meaner sort of people but onlie by Physitians Apothecaries and Herbalistes therefore I haue onlie spoken of such as are commonlie knowne and daylie vsed And this shall suffice for Spices Drugges and medicinable herbes The 84. Chapter Of all sorts of Pearles both great and small and of precious stones as Diamantes Rubies Topaces Saffires and other such like stones called Oriental stones and of the Bezers stone which is good against poyson and such like diseases and in what manner and place they are found PEarles by the Portingales are called Perolas that is such as are great and the small Alioffar in Latin Margaritas in Arabia Lulu in Persia and India Motu and in Malabar Mutiu The principall and the best that are found in all the Orientall countries and the right Orientall pearles are some betwéene Ormus and Bastora in the straights or Sinus Persicus in the places called Bareyn Catissi Iulfar Camaron other places in the said Sinus Persicus from whence they are brought into Ormus The King of Portingale also hath his Factor in Bareyn that stayeth there onlie for the fishing of pearles There is great trafficke vsed with them as well in Ormus as in Goa There are also other fishings for pearle as betwéene the Iland of Seylon and the Cape de Comriin where great numbers are yearelie found for that the King of Portingale hath a captaine there with certaine soldiers that looketh vnto it they haue yearlie at the lest aboue 3 or 4 thousaÌ„d duckers y t liue onlie by fishing for pearles and so maintaine themselues whereof euerie yeare many are drowned or deuoured by y e fishes called Tubarones or Hayen whereof I haue alreadie made meÌ„tion these pearls are not so good nor so much esteemed as the pearles of Ormus and are of a lower price which they know likewise how to discerne at the first sight There are also pearles found by the Iland of Borneo and the Iland of Aynon on the coast of Cauchinchina but those of Ormus surpasse them all They are fished for by dukers that diue into the water at the least 10 12 and 20 fadome déepe They grow in Oysters but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swimme aloft and the smallest called Alioffar are commonly in the bottome of the sea The duckers are naked hauing a basket bound at their backes which being at the bottome to make the more hast they rake full of Oysters and durt together and then ryse vp againe and throwe them into boates that lie readie for the purpose with men in them which presentlie take the Oysters and lay them on land to drie where with the heate of the Sunne they open of themselues and so they find the pearles of Alioffar in the fish and when they haue made an end of fishing for that day all the Fishers with the Captaine Soldiers laborers and Watchmen for the King goe together and taking all the pearles that are caught that day they diuide them into certaine heapes that is one part for the King an other part for the Captaine and Soldiers the third part for the Iesuites because they haue their Cloyster in that place and brought the Countrie first vnto the Christian Faith and the last part for the Fishers which is done with great Iustice and equalitie This fishing is done in Summer tyme and there passeth not any yeare but that diuers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin which is called the Kings fishing and manie deuoured by Fishes so that when the fishing is done there is a great and pitifull noyse and cry of women and Children heard vpon the land for the losse of their husbands and friends yet the next yeare they must to the same worke againe for that they haue no other meanes to liue as â—lso for that they are partlie compâ—lled thereunto by the Portingales but most part are content to doe it because of the gaine they get thereby after all the danger is past They finde sometimes many and sometimes but a few Pearles in one oyster sometimes two hundred graines and more The oysters that haue the best Pearles in them are thinne and white which the Indians call Cheripo wherof they make spoones and cups to drink in The Pearles are sold by siues which are made of mettell driuen into thin plate for that purpose whereof the holes are round There are many sorts of these siues the first hath small holes and the Pearles that passe through them are at one price the next siue hath greater holes and the Pearles that fall through it are at higher price and so foorth at the least seauen or eight siues The small stuffe that serue for no Pearles they call Alioffar and are sold by the ounce and vsed by Potticaries and Phisitions and to that end many of them are caried into Portingall Venice and are very good cheape To giue the Pearles a faire colour in India they vse rice beaten a little with salt wherewith they rub them and then they become as faire and cleare as christall and so continue There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Chaâ—lia by the Portingales Madre Perolâ— or in other of Pearle are of the shell fishes that wee call inkehornes which they know how to prepare and make cleane They bring many of them into Portingale to sâ—rue for to drinke in and to keepe for an ornament for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen some guilt and painted with colours very faire some wrought with branches and other figures as we dayly see them brought thether In India they make diuers thinges of them as deskes tables cubbards tables to play on boâ—es staues for women to beare in their hands and a thousand such fine deuises which are all inlaid and couered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearle very faire to beholde very workmanlike made and are in India so commoÌ„ that there is almost no place in those countries but they haue of them
almost slaine two or three of our men But God had pittie on vs so that there happened no other hurt but that some of them were a litle amazed This continued to the fourteenth of April without any change whereupon all the Officers of the shippe assembled together with others of the companie taking counsell what was best to be done and perceiuing the shippe not to bee strong enough to passe the Cape they concluded by protestation whereunto they subscribed their hands to sayle with the ship to Mosambique and there to winter and to repaire the shippe and prouide all necessaries for it which greatly greeued the common sort because they did find as great danger in turning backe againe to Mosambique as to passe the Cape for that they were to sayle againe by the land Donatal which they feared as much as the Cape and also though they did arriue at Mosambique yet they accounted it as much as a lost Viage For that they must stay there till the next yeare and there spend all they haue for that all things that come thether are brought out of India so that euerie thing is there as â—eare as gold which would bee hard for the poore Saylers and Swabbers as hauing but little meanes to relieue themselues and therby they should be constrained to sel that litle they had broght with them for halfe the value and besides that they were as then about â—00 miles froÌ„ Mosambique Wherefore there grew great noyse and murmuring in the ship among the Saylers that cursed the Captaine and the Officers because the ship was badly prouided for it had not one rope more then hung about the ship nor any thing wherof to make them if those that we had should haue chanced to breake The Captaine laide the faulte on the Master because hee asked them not when hee was at land and the Maâ—ter saide that he had spoken for them and that the Cairo or Hemp whereof in India the ropes are made was deliuered vnto the Captaine and that he had sold y e best part thereof to put the money in his purse that was the cause why we wanted with this disorder they bring their matters to passe not once remembring what may after fall out but when they are in danger theÌ„ ther is nothing els but crying Misericordia and calling to our lady for helpe the Captaine could not tell what to answere séeing vs in that trouble but said that he maruelled at nothing so much as why our Lord God suffered them beeing so good Christians and Catholiques as they were to passe the Cape with so great torments and dangerous weather hauing so great and strong shippes and that the Englishmen béeing as he said Heretickes and blasphemers of God with so smal weake vessels passed y e Cape so easilie for they had receaued newes in India that an English Shippe had passed the Cape with verie great ease And so wee made backe againe towards Mosambique being in great dispaire for that no man cared for laying his hand to worke and hardlie would any man obay the Officers of the Shippe In this manner sayling wee perceiued diuers vesselles and bordes with dead men bound vpon them driuing in the Sea which comforted vs a little thinking that some other of the shippes were in the same taking and had throwne some of their goods ouer bord and so made towardes Mosambique before vs whereby we thought to haue company and that we alone were not vnfortunate for that is commonlie said that companions in miserie are a comfort one to an other and so it was to vs but I would to God it had bene so as we imagined but it was farre worse then turning backe againe for those were the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas as being in the Iland of S. Helena as we were afterwards aduertised The 15. of April we had an other great calme which continued till the 17 day and taking the hight of the Sunne we found our selues to be vnder 37 degrees to the great admiration of al the company for that being as I said vnder 35 degrees and hauing sayled for the space of 5 dayes with so great a wind and stormy weather towards Mosambique we should rather by al mens reason haue lessened our degrees by estimation wee made account to haue bene vnder 30 or 32 degrees at the highest but the cause why our shippe went backward in that sort against wind and weather towards the Cape thinking wee made towards Mosambique was by the water which in those countries carieth with a verie strong streame towards the cape as the Pylot tould vs he had proued at other times yet he thought not that the water had runne with so great a streame as now by experience he found it did so as it séemed that God miraculouslie against all mans reason and iudgement and all the force of wind and stormes would haue vs passe the Cape wheÌ„ we were least in hope thereof whereby we may plainelie perceiue that all mens actions without the hand of God are of no moment The same day againe we saw gréene water and the birdes called Mangas de Velludo or veluet sléeues which are certain signes of the cape de bona Speranza which put vs once againe in hope to passe it and about euening a swallow flew into our shippe wherat they much reioiced saying that it was a sign and foreshowing that our Lady had sent the Swallow on bord to comfort vs and that we should passe the Cape wherewith they agreed once againe to proue if we could passe it séeing we had such signes and tokens to put vs in good comfort that God would help vs. This being concluded we sung the Letany with Ora pro nobis and gaue many almes with promises of pilgrimages and visitations and such like things which was our dayly worke With that the saylers others began to take courage and to be lustie euery man willinglie doing his office offering rather to lose life and welfare in aduenturing to passe the Cape then with full assurance of their safetie to returne vnto Mosambique we had as then great waues and very bigge water in the sea which left vs not till wee came to the other side of the Cape The 18 of Aprill we fell againe into the wind with as great stormes and foule weather as euer we had before so that we thought verily we should haue bene cast away for that at euerie minute the sea couered our ship with water to lighten her we cast diuers chestes and much Cinamon with other thinges that came first to hand ouer bord wherewith euerie man made account to die and began to confesse themselues and to aske each other forgiuenes thinking without more hope that our last day was come This storme continued in this sort at the least for the space of 24 houres in the mean time great almes were giuen in our shippe to many Virgin Maries and other Saints
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
meanes we could to saue him yet we could not doe it by reason wee sayled before the winde The same day at night wee saw the Iland of Ascention and lauered all that night because we would not passe the Iland In the Morning the 28. of May we sayled about the Iland to sée if there were any ground to Anker on because the Admirall was so leake that shee could no longer holde out and the men desired the Officers of the shippe that they would lay the goods on land in the Iland of Ascention and there leaue it with good watch and necessaries for them that keepe it and so sayle with the emptie ship to Portingall and there procure some other shippe to fetch the goods thinking it was sufficient to haue it well watched and kept there for that there commeth not a ship in twentie yeares into that Iland because there is nothing in it to be had We went close vnto it by a verie white and faire Sand where the Admirall and all the shippes cast out the Lead and found from eightie to fiftie and 4â— Fadomes water and although they might haue gone closer to the land yet the Officers excused themselues saying that they coulde not goe neerer and that it was too deepe and verie dangerous for them to Anker there Which they said to pacifie the men desiring that they might borow two Pumpes nore of the other shippes and so without doubt they woulde bring the shippe safe vnto Portingall and although it would bee great paine and labour for them to doe it yet they must of force content themselues for that the Admirall and all the Gentlemen that were in the shippe pumped both day and night as their turnes came about as well as the meanest in the shippe onely to encourage the people They borowed one Pumpe of the Saint Mary and sent to desire vs to lend them another and although our ship was none of the best among the Fleet we were of opinion not to lend him any as not knowing what neede wee should haue our selues hauing so long a way to sayle yet in the end seeing the great necessitie they were in we lent them one the rather because they sayd that the Admirals meaning was if it were calme wether to discharge some of their wares into other shippes thereby to lighten themselues but it fell not out as they thought so that with great miserie and labor they ouercame their iournie The 95. Chapter Of the Iland called the Ascention THis Iland was discouered vpon Ascention daye and in shew séemeth as great as the Iland of Saint Hellena but not so high It is ful of hilles and dales lying vnder eight degrées and a halfe on the South-side of the Equinoctiall line and lyeth Northwest distant from Saint Helena 19â— Spanish miles and from the Equiâ—octiall line 140. miles There is not any fresh water in the Iland nor one greene leafe or branch It hath many hilles of a reddish colour which shew like a certaine Earth in Spaine called Almagro and is full of stonie hilles and dryed land it is like Saint Helena There hath beene some shippes there that missed Saint Helena and sought for fresh water in that Iland but could find none It hath certaine faire and white Sandes about it and great store of Fish wherein it surpasseth S. Helena but in it there are no beastes at all onely by reason of the great quantitie of Fishes Ther are so many Birds in it y t it is strange and they are of the bignesse of young Geese came by thousands flying about our ships crying and making great noyse and ranne vp and downe in the shippe some leaping and sitting on our shoulders and armes not once fearing vs so that wee tooke many of them and wrung of their neckes but they are not good to eate because they taste morish I thinke the cause they are so tame is because they see but few men and some desire to goe to them About that Iland and the Iland of Saint Helena vnto the Equinoctiall line there are flying Fishes as great as Herings which flie by great flockes together two or thrée Fadome aboue the water and flie in that manner at the least a quarter of a mile vntill their wings or finnes be drie and then they can flie no longer but fall into the water and there wet themselues and then flie againe aboue the water The cause why they flie in that sort is because they are chased by the great fishes that eate them and to escape from them they flie aboue the water and some times into the shippes for many of them fell into our ship which flew too high for wheÌ„ their wings are drie they must needes fall From that Island of Ascention the shippes held their course Northwest and by West til they be a degree past the Equinoctiall line on the North side where there lyeth a cliffe called Penedo de Sam Pedro which many times they sée and to it from the Islande of Ascention are 300. miles The 5. of Iune we passed againe the Equinoctiall line and then again began we to see the North starre which we had lost vnder ten degrées on this side Cochijn and now began to lose the sight of the South starre and there we had the sun in the South at twelue of the clocke at noone in which on the other side of the line at the same time is in the North. The 8. of Iune being 4. degrées in the North we lost our generall South east winde that had serued vs from the Cape de bona Speranza thether then began the raines and calmes for as then we began to come neare the coast of Guinea which continueth to 9. degrees These calmes and raines helde vs till 11. degrées being the 20 of Iune whereby the ships seperated themselues by reason of the calmes which made them not able to stéerre and in the 11. degrees they met againe and there we had a North east wind which is called the generall winde because it floweth continually in those Countries and holdeth to 30. and â—2 degrées beginning many times at 6. and 7. degrees but wee had it not till wee were vnder 1â— degrées This wind is somewhat scant for wee must of force saile in the wind because our chiefe course is Northwest and by North. The 23. of Iune we passed the point of Capo Verde which is vnder 15. degrées and the 26. of the same month we passed the Islands of Capo Verde which are ten in number They beginne vnder 15. degrées and end in 19. degrées and are distant from the firme land of Capo Verde from 70. to 1â—0 miles inwards to the sea Then wee entred into the sea called Sergasso which is all couered with hearbes so that it séemeth to be like a gréene fielde so thicke that a man can not see the water neyther can the ships passe through them but with great labour vnlesse they haue a strong wind The
all places There is likewise great store of Sugar which is much esteemed and also caryed into all countries of Christendome which causeth great trafficke vnto those Ilands as well by Spaniardes and Portingalles as other nations and is the common staple for the shippes that sayle out of Spayne into the West Indies and refreshe themselues there and also take in such Wyne as they commonly vse to carry with them to the West Indies They haue also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles and are now inhabited by Spanyardes hauing yet therein many of the naturall borne inhabitantes which they doe call Guanchas who by reason of their long conuersation with the Spaniardes doe wholly vse their customes and manner of apparell The chiefe of these Islands is great Canaria where there is a Bishop and the inquisition with the tribunal Royall and it hath the gouernment ouer all the other Islandes that are called the Canaries The 6. of Iulie wee were vnder 32. degrees where wee lost the generall North-East wind and had a calme and saw much of the hearbe called Sargasso which couered all the sea The 〈◊〉 of the same month we got againe before the wind being vnder 34. degrees and then we saw no more of the hearbe Sargasso but a faire cleare sea The eighteenth of Iulie wee were vnder 39. degrees vnder which height lieth the Iland called de Coruo and the Island of Tercera and also the riuer of Lisbone all these dayes we had many calmes The next day wee had a West winde being a right fore-wind and saw many flying fishes almost as great as Haddockes that flew thrée or foure fadomes high aboue the water The 22. of Iuly the winde continuing about noone we saw the Ilands called Flores and de Coruo which lie one close to the other from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles At that time wee began to haue many sick men that is to say some sicke in their eyes and some in their breaste and bellies by reason of the long voiage and because their victuals began to loose the taste sauour and many wanted meat whereby diuers of them through want were compelled to seeth rice with salt water so that some of them died which many times were found vnder the fore deck that had laine â—ead two or three dayes no man knowing it which was a pittifull sight to behold considering the miserie they indured aboard those ships There died in our ship from India vnto that place of slaues and others to the number of 24. persons The same day about Euening being hy the Islandes of Flores and Coruo wee perceiued thrée shippes that made towards vs which came from vnder the land which put vs in great feare for they came close by our Admiral shot diuers times at him at another ship of our companie whereby wee perceiued them to be English men for they bare an English flagge vpon their maine tops but none of them shewed to be aboue 60. tunnes in greatnes About Euening they followed after vs and all night bore lanternes with Candles buâ—ning in them at their sternes although the Moone shined The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl the next day being betwéene the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand and the small Island called Câ—oâ—o on our left hand we esspied the thrée English ships still following vs that tooke counsell together whereof one sayled backwards thinking that some other ship had come after vs without company for a small time was out of sight but it was not long before it came againe to the other two wherewith they tooke counsell came all thrée together against our shippe because we lay in the lée of all our ships and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steede of a sconce thinking to deale so with vs that in the end we should be constrained to runne vppon the shore whereof wee wanted not much and in that manner with their flagges openly displayed came lustily towardes vs sounding their Trumpets and sayled at the least three times about vs beating vs with Musket and Caliuer and some great péeces and did vs hurt in the body of our shippe but spoyled all our sayles and ropes and to conclude we were so plagued by them that no man durst put forth his head and when wee shot off a peece we had at the least an houres worke to lade it againe whereby wee had so great a noise and crie in the ship as if we had all bin cast away whereat the English men themselues beganne to mocke vs and with a thousand iesting words called vnto vs. In the meane time the other shippes hoised all their sailes did the best they could to saile to the Island of Tercera not looking once behinde them to help vs doubting they should come too late thether not caring for vs but thinking themselues to haue done sufficiently so they saued their own stakes whereby it may easily be séene what company they kéepe one with the other what order is among them In the end the English men perceiuing small aduantage against vs little knowing in what case and feare we were as also because we were not far froÌ„ Tercera left vs which made vs not a litle to reioyce as thinking our selues to be risen from death to life although we were not well assured neither yet voide of feare till we lay in the road before Tercera vnder the safetie of the Portingales fort that we might get thether in good time we made all the sailes we could on the other side we were in great doubt because wee knew not what they did in the Island nor whether they were our friendes or enemies and wee doubted so much the more because wee found no men of war nor any Caruels of aduise froÌ„ Portingal as we made our accounts to doe that might conuay vs from thence or giue vs aduise as in that countrie ordinarilie they vse to do because the English men had bin so victorious in those parts it made vs suspect that it went not well with Spaine they of the Iland of Tercera were in no lesse feare then we for that séeing our deer they thought vs to be Englishmen that we came to ouer run the Iland because the 3. English meÌ„ had bouÌ„d vp their flags came in company with vs for the which cause the Iland sent out 2. Caruels that lay there with aduise from the King for the Indian ships that should come thither Those Caruels came to view vs and perceiuing what wee were made after vs wherevppon the English ships left vs made towardes them because the Caruels thought them to be friends and shunned them not as supposing them to be of our company but we shot foure or fiue times and made signes vnto them that they should make towards the Island which they presently did The English men perceiuing that did put forwards into
vsed by them but are rather kept short so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne without licence and therefore men may quyetlie trauell throughout the Iland both day and night without any trouble Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spaniards but by the Portingals themselues before their troubles for they would neuer permit it and which is more all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a certain street wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto but they may goe in all places of the towne within the Iland but not about it to view the coast which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs by the Gouernor himself who lent vs his horses to ryde about and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes which at this time is not permitted to the naturall borne Ilanders neyther are they so much credited We road twice about the Iland which he granted vs leaue to doe by meanes of certaine particular friendship we had with him neyther could the Portingales hinder vs therein because wee were in the Kinges seruice as Factors for the Kinges Pepper and for that they held and accounted vs as naturall borne Portingalles for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland that hee might haue sent it to the King wherein I excused my self yet I made him the town with the Hauen coming in and Fortes of Angra which he sent vnto the King the like whereof you may in this Booke behold for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee and shewed mee much friendshippe Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot that willinglie would haue gone with vs to sée the Iland but could not be suffered for the Portingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof and so seeke to defeate them of their right But returning to our matter the Ilandes are verie good and holesome ayre and the diseases that are most common in those Countries though not verie plentiful but only here there one are one sicknes called O Ax that is a kind of bad ayre y t taketh them maketh them altogether lame or half lame of their limmes or of some one limme and an other sicknes that is called O Sange that is a certaine blood that hastelie cometh vppon a man as a swelling in the eyes or other places of the face or of the bodie is as red as blood for as they say it is nothing els but méere blood these are two diseases like the plague and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers and are vnreasonable moyst which is one of the principall causes of these diseases for the windes are there so strong and dangerous that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses and bring them into powder for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house as thicke as a mans arme and the windowes of hard free stone which were so consumed by the wind that the Iron in some places was become as thynne as a straw and the stone in like sort and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones which they digge in the water out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Illandes whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it and yet that Custome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before at the most In this Iland besides the two townes there are diuers great villages as S. Sebastians S. Barboran Altares Gualua Villa noua with manie other parishes and hamlets so that for the most part it is built and inhabited sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods which can hardlie bee trauelled much lesse inhabited Their most traffique is as I said before the wood that groweth in those countries I meane for such as deale in marchandise and the workemen that make it but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia Cabo Verde and Guinea all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh themselues as lying very fitly for that purpose so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues and sell at their wares as well handie works as victuals vnto those shippes and all the Ilandes round about doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares to sell it there For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes béeing assured that all shippes for want of refreshing must of force put into those Ilandes although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes to the great discommoditie of the Ilands and the shippes From Tercera Southeast about 27. or 28. miles lyeth the Iland of S. Michael which is about 20 myles long and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada where there is great traffique of English Scots and French men onlie as in Tercera because of the woad which is more abundant in that Ilande then in all the rest of them for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad It hath likewise great abundance of Corne so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round about them It hath neither Hauens nor Riuers but onlie the broad sea and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort so that many set sayle with all the windes and put to sea which in the road of Tercera they may not doe and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing but what they will themselues to doe There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne From the Iland of S. Michaels Southwardes twelue myles lyeth the Island Santa Maria which is about ten or twelue myles compasse and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth which the other Ilands fetch from thence It hath no Woad but is full of all victualles like Tercera and inhabited by the Portingales There are no Spaniardes in it because it is a stonie Countrie like Tercera and hard to bord whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it While I remained in Tercera the Earle of Comberland came thether to take in fresh water and some other victuals but the inhabitants would not suffer him to haue it but
according to their manner and after many other wordes hee willed them to bring some Iron saying they should haue teeth for it which hauing done he brought forth his teeth This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles and sea horses it hath many creekes and as they sailed from Crementun it lyeth Southeast where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres and came twice on ground and â—â— sayling forwardes they passed by an Island called Caraceâ—â—bo lying in the mouth of the riuer as there are many being verie low and flat land and ful of trees From that Island there came a Caâ—utien aboord their ship and in it eighteene persons and with them they had a smal drum of a hollow stocke whereon they played and being by the ship foure or fiue of them stept in whereof one of them vppon his face breast and armes was al white he bore a greene branch of a tree with a little bel and some whiting in his hand which hee strowed about the ship ringing the bel when they or any of our men spake hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship which done sirting downe and stammering in his words like a man possessed with some sprite or one that had a shaking feuer There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth whereof they dranke one vnto the other which continued for the space of halfe an houre which done they went into their scâ—te rowed to land making signes to our men to come on shore and to barter with them for their wares which they did carrying them some Iron and other marchandise and went into the gouernors house being in a village where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foote high couered with straw and opeÌ„ on the side vnder the which stood a little gibet wheron hung a little horne with certaine stuffe therein which they would not lette them see by no meanes and vnder the gibet stood a staffe with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it hauing in the one eye a bone much like the bone that is founde in the head of a â—addocke whereof with vs they make horses bridles and collars for degs at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones both of fishes and beasts and among the rest the â—awes of a Prisâ—â— which in our countrey is called a sword fish without teeth which the master tooke away brought it vnto me our men asking what y t might signifie they said there lay a dead carcas and being in another village as they passed forwarde they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses whereof some seemed to bee of the principal commanders and within that house there was a noyse of singing both by great and smal that it made them muse whereupon they asked what it meant they saide there was one dead The women being in trauel are not any thing ashamed but euery one both yong and old men and women run vnto her the doore standing wide open but one thing is to be wondered at that the children are al circumcised and yet they haue neither law order nor knowledge of God The countrey is fruitful and ful of al strange fruites and abounding in al kinds of beasts and birds of diners formes both great and smal There are some trees where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests altogether most pleasant to behold They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes because snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges many of those nests were brought vnto me This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited calling it Torriâ—â—am Zonam that is a place in the earth that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp but they were altogether deceiued for as Odoardus Lopez a Portingale witnesseth hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein There is good dwelling and the aire coÌ„trarie to al mens iudgements very temperate and that in winter there is no extreame cold but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome They vse no linings nor shirte bandes nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles then in the vallies but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer onely because of the continual raines specially about the middle of the day two houres before and as much after dinner which heat is very euill for our meÌ„ to endure The people of the countrie are black but part of the women fear what â—â—llow their haire for the most part is blacke and curled and some haue red haire they are of a mean stature therin not much vnlike the Portingales the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours blacke and sea colour their lips not so thicke as those of Nâ—bâ—a other Moores their faces of al proportions fat leane and indifferent betweene both like the Portingales and not like other Moores of Guinea that are foule and deformed The length of the day and night is in a maâ—er al one for that it differeth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement throughout the whole yeare their winter beginneth in our lent about the middle of March and their summer in the middle of September â— in winter it raigneth there continually for the space of fiue moneths that is Aprill May Iune Iuly August in which time there are but few faire daies and there the raine falleth in such great drops that it is wonderful which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick muddie water so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries are as Hippocrates and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome naming them with a greek name Eâ—esâ—oâ— Northwest by the Portingales called Venâ—o Maestro or general wiâ—d as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries which are likewise causes of the raines by driuing vp of mâ—stes and vapors vppon the tops of the hils which being there and resoluing into water doo fil the earth with raine and those continual raines are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus and al the riuers there abouts some running into the Mediterranean others into y e great Ocean seas by reason of their slime fattines and because in our sumer which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Congo and Ethiopia it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater
and do ouerflow more then they are in the furder and very drie countries for in Egypt not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same where it neuer raineth it is holden for a verie strange wonderful thing how the riuer Niâ— should grâ—w so high ful of thicke muddie water and alwaies at one time of the yeare not fayling therein thereby refreshing the earth and giuing foode both to man and beast whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle for that without the increase thereof they would die for hunger their liues â—as Iohn Chrisostome sayth consisteth of the increasing of the waters so then the Northwest winds that in our summer time which is their winter blow in our countries are the meanes in those countries to gather cloudes and moystures vpon the high hilles from whence their raine proceedeth which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing ouerflowing of the riuer Niâ—us and other riuers in those countries wherof the inhabitants haue deuised and written to many fables But in their summer which is our winter there bloweth contrary windes as south and southeast which without al doubt are cold as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike and coole those countries as our winds do here in these countries like as with theÌ„ they cause a faire cleare aire so with vs they cause great store of raines by a certain natural disposition of the heauens the climates ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God that hath diuided the heauens ordained the course of the sun and other planets in such maner that al parts of the earth by their light brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes therein do continue with great proportion and equalitie so that for certain if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia Congo and other places bordering on the same it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies the countries of Asia Mynor and those of Suria and Egypt which liue by the refreshing of those generall Northwest west winds which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero that is bringing life those also are the cause that in Ethiopia Congo and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth no not vpon the highest hilles vnlesse it bee further off towardes the Cape de Bona Speranza or in some certaine places by the Portingales called Snow hilles as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow which with them would bee more esteemed then gold therewith to coole their drink so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow but only by means of the coÌ„tinual raine of fiue moneths as I said before But returning to our former matter you may trauel to Congo by two waies one by the main sea to S. Helena and so further ouer or along by the coast of Affrica to the Island of Saint Thomas and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equinoctiall line about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island and from thence they saile with the wind that commeth off the land along the coast euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vntill they arriue at the place where they desire to be The kingdome of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina which lyeth on the South side of the Equinoctial line vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast you saile by certain hils and strands not woorth the noting till you come to two creekes in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales that is the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzaleâ— not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea by reason of the rednesse thereof by the Portingales called Rio de â—as Boreras Râ—slas because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande that coloureth the water at that place beginneth a high hill called by the Portingales la Sierra Complida that is a long hill passing further there is another riuer called â—a â—e â—as Almadias which is as much to say as the creeke or hauen for shippes because in that place many bankes are made in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited wherein there is a hauen for little ships the other two are not inhabited Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo called Zaâ—e taking his beginning or spring partly froÌ„ the same lake froÌ„ whence the riuer Nylus doth flow This riuer casteth forth so great aboundance of water that it is incredible for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles broad on y e vpper part it is fresh water for 8 10. 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea whereby the pilots sailing ouer it know what place they are in Vpwards into this riuer you may saile with great barks she length of fine miles but not higher by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground as the riuers of Nilus Donow and Rhein do in some places which are called Cataraâ—tas that is shedings or fallings of waters making so great a noyse that it may bee heard a great way from it In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many Islands al inhabited and very populous that haue diuers gouernours al subiectes to the king of Congo In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the other in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree in their language called Licondo whereof some are so great that sixe men cannot fadome them with height and length correspondent so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute woulde holde two hundred men Those scutes they rowe with ores wherwith they make great speede euery man hauing an ore and a bowe and when they fight they lay downe the ore and vse their bowe and to steere and winde those scutes they vse no other ruther than one of those ores In this riuer there are many strange beastes specially Crocadiles that are very great in their language called Carman the sea horse and another that seemeth to haue handes and a taile like vnto a Flaske which they call Ambize Angulo that is a sea hogge because it is as fatte as a hogge it hath a good and sauoury flesh not like fish although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer but eateth
the grasse that groweth on the riuers side and hath an head like an ore whereof there are some that weigh fiue hundred poundes the Fisher men that take them are bound vpon pain of death to bring them to the King There you finde an other hooke of land called Cabo di Padran and alittle from thence the riuer Lelunda which commeth out of a small lake lying within the land from whence more Riuers haue their off-spring specially one called Coanza wherof hereafter I will speake This riuer Lelunda when it rayneth not is very drie so that it may be passed ouer by foote it runneth vnder the hill whereon Congo the chiefe cittie doth stand and from thence to the riuer of Ambrizi which is a great riuer with a hauen and runneth not farre from the riuer of Congo into the sea a litle further you come to an other riuer called â—â—ze which hath no hauen and from thence to Onzo another riuer with a good hauen hauing her spring out of the same lake from whence the riuer Nylus doth issue and somwhat more to the south lieth the riuer Lemba but it hath no hauen nor yet saileable From thence you come to Damde a very great riuer wherin ships of two hundred tuns may saile out of this riuer there runneth an arme or braunche lying southward called Bengo which with Coanza another great riuer make the Island of Loanda both their streames meeting together driue foorth much filth and sand which make the Island greater Bengo is a great streame or riuer which may be sailed vppe at the least fiue and twenty Italian miles which are about fiue Dutch miles and betweene these two Islands as I saide before lieth the rich Island of Loanda with the hauen called by the name of the Island Loanda which is as much to lay euen or flat land without hilles This Island is about four miles long and somewhat lesse than a quarter of a mile broad and in some places not aboue a bowe shoote broad where there is a thing much to be wondered at that when it is ful sea if one dig but twoo or three handfuls deep into the grouÌ„d they shal find fresh water and digging in the same ground when it ebbeth the water is salt and brackish In this Island of Loanda are fished the Schulpekens which in the kingdome of Congo and other places borduring thereabouts are vsed for mony which fishing is done in this maner There are certayne women that being on the sea side goe alittle way into the water lading certayne baskets with sand which being filled they carry them on land wash the sand from the Schulpkens that are very small and in great numbers by them esteemed of twoo sortes some males other females which in shew and colour are the fairest and although many of them are found vpon the strand or shore of the riuer of Congo yet those of Loanda are the best fairest most esteemed of they are very shining and of an ash colour other colours are of no account for those Schulplikens you may buy any kinde of thing whether it be gold siluer or any kinde of victualles whereby you may perceiue that not onely in the kingdome of Congo and the countries about it but also in other places of Affrica and in the kingdome of Chyna and some part of India they haue vsed other kindes of things in steed of mony as we vse gold siluer copper and such like mixtures for in Ethiopia they vse pepper corns for mony In the kingdome of â—buâ—o about the riuer Niger Shuâ—penes and Porcelleten as also in China and Ben â—alen so that mettall is not so much esteemed of in most partes of the worlde as it is in Europa and other places circumtacent In this Island there are seauen or eight villages by them called Libatâ— whereof the principall is called the Holighost wherein the gouernour is resident being sent from Congo where he administreth Iustice and looketh sharpelye to the fishing of Schalpekens There are many beasts goates and wilde swine for that the tame become wilde and runne into the woods also therein groweth a great and strange tree called Enlanda being alwaies gréene of a strange form specially in the branches that grow very high and cast downe certaine small threedes which touching the earth do bring forth roots from whence other plants or trees do spring forth most aboundantly in great numbers vnder the first rhinde or barke of this tree groweth a certaine linnen which being beaten and made cleane and then stretched foorth in breadth and length it serueth to apparell the common people In this Island also they vse shipps made of palme or Indian nut trees the boordes being peeced together after the manner of the Portingale barkes wherein they vse both sailes and oâ—es and with them they fish in all the riuers thereabout which are very full of fish and with them likewise they row vnto the firme land On that side which reacheth towardes the firme land there are trees that growe in certaine deepe places on the shore vpon the rootes whereof the sea continually beateth where groweth oysters as broade as a mans hand verie good to be eaten and wel knowne to that countrey people which they call Ambiziamatare which is to say stone fish The Island at one ende is very neere vnto the firme land and the chanell is oftentimes swoome ouer by the countrey people and in the same chanel there are certaine smal Islandes which when it floweth are not seene but when it ebbeth they appeare aboue the water and being vncouered they finde the oysters lying at the rootes of the trees hare by the Island on the outwarde part swim many whales that are blacke and fight togither killing ech other wherof being fished taken vp by the Moores they make treane oile with the which and with pitch togither they dresse their ships the mouth of the â—auen lieth in the north in breadth aboue halfe an Italian mile being very deep and right ouer against it on the firme land lieth the village of S. Paul not very strongly fortified and inhabited by Portingales that are brought the thither with wife and children out of Portingale all the channell is very full of fish specially of Sardins and Enchâ—ones which in winter time are there in so great abundaunce that they leape vpon the shore also diuers other good fishes as soales sturgeons barbles and great creuiâ—hes which are very wholesome and are there found in great numbers whereby the common people doe liue Satling further from Loanda you come to the Riuer called Coanza which Riuer with Bengo and other Riuers aforesaide doe make the Island of Loanda so that Coanza also hath her off-spring from a little lake which maketh a Riuer that floweth out of the same greate lake from whence Nylus and other Riuers haue their issue which Lake in this Carde is called Zane or Zembre of the ancient fathers Tritoms Lanis because therein as it is saide
Portingales do yearely watch for the Turkish ships which saile with many costly wares not hauing licence of them they are boorded and spoyled of their wares by the Portingales presuming themselues to be lords of al the traffike in those coūtries not permitting any other to traffike therin but onely themselues or by theyr licence Hauing sailed about this Cape de Guarda Fuy and setting your course towardes the redde Sea there are other townes and hauens inhabited by the Mahometanes the first called Meth the other being somewhat further Barbora and there are the last white people from thence you finde al blacke people and beyond that you come to Ceila Dalaca Malaca Carachin which coast in their spéech is called Baragiam being al Moores and expert in armes their apparrell from the middle vpwarde being of cotten linnen The chéefe gouernours or nobles weare Cappoten which they cal Bermissi this countrey is rich of gold Iuory mettal and al kind of victuals From thence you come to the mouth of the red sea wherein lyeth an Island called Babelmandel on both sides wherof there runneth a channel into the red sea whereof the West side is almost fiftéene Italian that is three Duch miles broade through the which al the shippes doe passe both in and out the channel lying on the other side is shallow and ful of sandes and cliffes so that in al it is about sixe Duch miles broade whereof the one poynt lying in the Affrican shore is called Raibel and the other lying in the countrey of Arabia Felix is called Ara whereabouts also is the hauen of the rich towne of Aden in Arabia alreadie spoken of in this booke This water runneth inward vnto Swes being about 1200. Italian miles in lēgth on both sides altogether dry and verie shallow ful of Islandes déep only in the middle where the shippes do ordinarily saile which is onely by the great swift course of the water which scouring the channel kéepeth it cleane and déepe casting vp the sande on both sides Now to say something of Prester Iohn being the greatest and the mightiest prince in all Affrica his countrey beginneth from the enterance into the red sea and reacheth to the Island of Siene lying vnder Tropicus Cancri excepting the coast of the same sea which the Turke within these fiftie yeares hath taken from him so that his gouernment towards the Northwest and East lieth most part by the red sea and Northeast vpon Egypt and the desarts of Nubia and on the South side vpon Monomugi so that to set downe the greatnesse of all the countries which this Christian king hath vnder his commandement they are in compasse 4000. Italian miles The cheefe Cittie whereof and wherein he is most resident is called Belmalechi his gouernment is ouer many countries and kingdomes that are rich and aboundant in gold siluer and precious stones and al sorts of mettals his people are of diuers colours white blacke and betwéene both of a good stature and proportion The noblemen and gentlemen of the countrey apparrel themselues in silke Imbrodered with gold and other such like In this countrey they obserue lawes for wearing of apparrel by degrées as they do in Portingale for that some are not permitted to weare any other apparrel but Leather the people are Christians but hold certaine ceremonies of the Iewish lawe and vpon the day of the conception of the virgin Mary al the kings and Princes vnder his obedience do come vnto the saide towne of Belmalechi there to celebrate the feast euerie man bringing with him such treasor or yearely tribute as he is bound to pay and at the same feast the people come thither in pilgrimage to honour it wherevppon that day there is a great procession and out of the church from whence they come they bring an Image of the virgin Mary in form like a man of Massie gold and where the eyes should be it hath two great rubies the rest of the whole Image beeing wrought with excellent workmanship and set with many precious stones laying it on a beere of gold very cunningly wrought At this procession Prester Iohn himselfe is personally present either sitting in a Chariot of golde or riding on an Elephant most richly trapped himselfe apparrelled in most strange and costly cloth of golde al embrodered and set with pearles and stones most sumptuous to beholde to see this feast and Image the people runne in so great troupes that by reason of the prease many are thrust to death This Emperour Prestor Iohn is not rightly named for that his name is Belgian Bel signifying the highest perfectest and excellentest of all things and Gian Lorde or Prince which is proper to all that commaund or gouerne ouer others so then Belgian signifieth the chiefe or highest Prince which name being so ioyned is proper to none but to the king hauing also a surname of Dauid as our Emperours the name of Caesar or Augustus Here I must alittle discourse of the riuer Nylus which hath not her issue in Belgians land neither from the hilles of the Moone nor as Ptolomeus saith from the two lakes which he placeth in the midle between east and weast with the distance of almost foure hundred and fiftie Italian miles one from the other for that vnder the same pole wher in Ptolomeus placeth the saide two lakes lieth the two kingdoms of Congo and Angola towardes the weast and on the other side towards the east the kingdome of Monomotapa and Sofala with distance from the one sea to the other of about twelue hundred Italian miles and Odoardus saieth that in these countries there is but one lake which lieth on the bordures of Angola and Monomotapa which is in bignesse about a hundred ninety fiue Italian miles of the which lake wee are well assured and truely certified by those of Angola but on the east side of Sofala and Monomotapa there is no mention made of any other lake whereby it may be saide that vnder the same degrees there is no other lake True it is that there are yet two other lakes but they lie clean contrary to those whereof Ptolomeus writeth for hee as I saide before placeth his lakes right in the middle betweene east and weast and those whereof I speake lie right by direct line betweene north and south distant about foure hundred miles Some men in those countries are of opinion that Nilus springeth out of the first lake and then againe hideth it selfe vnder the earth and issue out againe in another place which some men deny and Odoardus saith that right the opinion therein is that Nylus passeth not vnder the earth but that it runneth through certayne fearefull and desart valleis where no man commeth or inhabiteth without anye certaine channell and so it is sayd that it runneth vnder the earth Therefore it is most certaine that Nyl◠floweth out of the first sake which lieth vnder twelue degrees by the pole antartike which lake is almost compassed
sun in their wars insteed of Ancients they tie the bones of certaine men who in their liues were valiaunt in armes vppon long staues and so carry them before them to incorage others to be the like and make them the readier to fight Their weapons are arrowes pikes made of palme tree wood and stone swordes They bury their kings with golden neckelaces sette with emerauldes and with bread and wine wherof the Spaniards haue foūd many such graues which they haue opened The people that dwell vpon the aforesaid great riuer are all Caniballs or Caribes as also those that dwell about saint Martha and in time past were Caribes The inhabitants of the Islandes of Boriquen Dominico Matitini Cibuchine now called saint Croce and Guadalupe as it is already declared which rowe on the water with scutes made of a certayn wood called Canois and that fought against those of Hispaniola and the people of the firme land whome they spoyled and eate The common opinion is that they came first out of the firme land of Caribana by Vraba and from Nombre de Dios in Indian speech called Caribes and all strong and valiaunt menne are nowe by them called Caribes which are very expert in bowes and arrowes The Brasilians name them Prophets or Soothsayers and Caribes Priests The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia poison their arrowes and before the Spaniards ouercame them they hadde continuall warres against the people of Bagota or Bogota they are good souldiers cruel and very reuengeatiue when they goe to warres they carry their Idoll Chiappen with them as a iudge of the victorie vnto whome before they enter into the field they offer many sacrifices and offerings of certaine liuing men béeing the children of slaues or of their ennemies painting all the Image with bloud which doone they doe eate the flesh when they retourned victorious they helde great feasts with dauncings leapings and singings some drinking themselues druncke and agayne besmeering their Image with blood and being ouercome they were sorrowfull and heauy seeking by new sacrifices to intreats theyr Chiappen that hée woulde helpe and assist them and send them victory against theyr enemies S. Martha SAint Martha is also a Towne and Hauen of the Spaniardes lying on the firme land vnder eleuen degrees on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fiftie Spanish miles from Carthagena it lieth at the foote of certayne hills so monstrous high that it is incredible howe in so great extreame heate so great quantitie of snowe should lie vpon the toppes of those hills which is seene a great way off and whereby the hauen is knowne This country was discouered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524. where it cost him his life not by the enemy but by his owne men that when he was asleepe killed him and gaue him fiue woundes in his body The people of this country are so cruell and fierce that they haue oftentimes driuen the Spaniards from their countrey not caring for the shippes but running into the sea till the water mounted as high as their breasts shooting with thousandes of poysoned arrowes and neuer would giue ouer were it not by meanes of the great shot together with the cries of such as were afraid and ran away thinking them to be thunder claps which oft times happen in those countries by reason of the euennesse of the countrey with the height of the hills The compasse of this hauen is three Spannish miles and so cleere that they may see stones lying on the ground within the water although it is at the least twentie elles deepe into this hauen there floweth twoo running waters but not fit for great ships but onely for little boates cut out of peeces of wood it is a great pleasure to heare what they report of the great numbers and goodnes of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salt water for the which cause they found many Fishermen thereabouts with many nettes made of packethreede hanging on cotten ropes which was their greatest liuing for that for fish they had whatsoeuer they desired of their neighbours In this country they found saphires emerauldes calcedonies iaspers amber brasil wood golde and pearles that is in the two prouinces Caramaira and Sacurma wherein the two hauens Carthagena and S. Martha do lie Caramaira is a very fruitfull and pleasant countrey wherein there falleth neither hard winter nor ouer hote summer day and night being there almost of a length The Spaniardes hauing taken in this country found gardeins ready planted moystned with strange waters like the gardeins in Italie their common meate is Ages luca Maiz Batatas and some fruites of trees such as other Indians therabouts do vse they eate fish also and mans flesh but not often Ages are rootes of the greatnesse of long turnopes in Italie pleasant of taste not much vnlike chesnuttes which they vse in banquets insteede of fruit Iuca is also a kinde of roote whereof they do make bread the Iuca that groweth in Cuba Hayti other Ilands is very hurtful being eaten raw and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholsome being otherwise eaten it is very good of taste these roots are planted not sowne which being ripe are as great as a mans arme or the smal of his leg ripeneth in halfe a yere but if it stand two yéeres in the ground it maketh better bread being ripe they are prest betweene 2 stones wherby the sap runneth forth which is very hurtful in the Islands vnlesse it be sodden as we doe milke otherwise being drunke of men or beasts it kills them as being a strong poison but sod till it consumeth to the half so let stand til it be cold it may be vsed insteede of vineger being sod til it be thick it becoms sweet like hony so they vse it in the firm land being raw for drink and sodden for vineger hony I said in the firme land for that in the Islands it is very dangerous venomous of the material substance of the roote being prest which is like almonds that are stampt they make round cakes as big as dollars which they bake is their Cacaui or bread wherewith they so long haue norished themselues this bread is somwhat harsh in the throat if it be not tempered with water or mixed with other meate Yet I had rather eate bread made of Maiz that is Brasilia wheate for that it giueth no lesse sustenance than our wheate is very wholsome agreeing with y e stomak wherof they make bread as we do of wheat Batatas are also common in great aboundance in this country which are roots of the thicknesse of a mans arme some smaller pleasant of taste and procuring good norishment yet they cause wind vnlesse you rost thē then they loose that effect specialy when they are eaten with any good wine of these rootes they also make conserues not much vnlike that which
string hiding their members therein or in a Snakes shel the rest of theyr bodies are al naked Thus much for the customes and manners of Curiana Betweene the Cape of Saint Roman and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara and P. Secco From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles the coast lying vnder tenne degrees betweene them lieth manie hauens and riuers specialy Puerto di Canna Fistola P. Fleâ—chado that is the point where they were shotte at with arrowes Punto Muerte the dead hauen Cabo de Ioan Blanco the cape of Iohn White Cabo la Colhera Rio Dunari Illa de Pirico Maracapana Chelheribiche St. Fee that is holy Faith Rio de Cumana Punta D'araâ—a Câ—mâ—â— and Maracapana along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands as Moines that is the Isle of Moonks Quiracao Buenaire Good Ayre Rocques or Roca Stone Rockes de Aues the Birds Tortuga Torteaux and then Cubagna or Margaritha the Isle of Pearles A certaine description of Maracapana and Cumana CVmana signifieth a Prouince and a Riuer wherin there is a towne and a cloister of grey Friers because of the great numbers of pearles that are found thereabouts The people of this countrey went naked onely that they couered their members eyther in a gorde or Snakes shels or else with bandes of reedes or cotton wooll in wars they weare mantles and decke themselues with feathers at feasts and bankets they paint themselues or else stroke themselues ouer with certaine gum and salues that be clammy wherein they sticke feathers of all colours which is no ill sight they cut their haire aboue their eares and if any haire grow vpon their knees or on their faces they pul them out and will haue no haire vpon any place of their body although they are by nature most of them without beards or haire and such as let their haire grow after the Spanish manner they call them beasts these people make great meanes to make their teeth blacke and such as haue them white they esteeme them to be women because they take no paines to make them blacke which they do with the powder or sap of a certaine hearbe by them called Hay or Gay which leaues are very soft like turpentine leaues and in fashion like Mortella being of the age of 15. yeers and that their courages began to rise they begin to beare those leaues in their mouths and to chaw them vntil their teeth become as blacke as coles which blacknesse continueth vntill they die which likewise preserueth the teeth from rotting spoyling or any paine they mire the powder of that leafe with another sort of powder of a kinde of wood and with chalk of white shells burned in which sort those of the East Indies vse their betele and Arrecca with chalke of oysters which is already declared in the description of the East Indies the powder of these leaues woodde and chalke they beare continually in their mouthes still chawing it which they keepe in basketts and boxes made of reedes to sel and barter the same in the markets round about them for gold slaues and cotten and for other wares al the maides goe naked only they weare certaine bandes about their knees which they binde very hard that their hips and thighes may seeme thicke which they estéeme for a beauty the married women weare shooes and liue very honestly and if they commit adultery they are forsaken by their husbands punished The lords and rich men of the country haue as many wiues as they list and if any man come to their houses to lodge they giue them one of the fairest to lie by them the rest haue but one and some none the women till the land and looke to the house and the men not being in the warres doe fish and hunt they are highminded reuengeatiue and hastie their chiefe weapons are poysoned arrowes which they prepare in diuers maners as with the blood of snakes the iuice of hearbes and mixtures of many other things whereby there is no means to heale such as are once wounded therewith The children women and men from their youth vpwards learne to shoote in bowes their meate is horsleaches battes grashoppers creuishes spiders bees and rawe sodden and rosted lice they spare no liuing creature whatsoeuer but they eat it which is to be wondered at considering their country is so wel replenished with good bread wine fruite fish and all kinde of flesh in great aboundance whereby it commeth that these people haue alwaies spots in their eyes or else are dimme of sight which some notwithstanding impute to the propertie of the water in the riuer of Cumana they close their gardens or lands with cotteÌ„ yarne by them called Bexuco placing it about the height of a man and among them it is accouÌ„ted for a great offence if any man should venter either to climbe ouer or creep vnder that cotten holding for certaine that whosoeuer doth teare it shal die presently after it The men of Cumana as I said before are much giuen to hunting wherein they are verie skilful They hunt and kil Lions Tigers Goates Ileren Hogs and al other kinde of foure footed beasts which they kil with bowes or take with nettes There are likewise in these prouinces many verie strange beasts part whereof are alreadie described and part not he therefore that desireth further instruction heerein let him reade the Spanish historiografers that write larger The women as I said til the ground sow Maiz and all kinde of corne plant Batates and other trees watering them specially the Hay wherewith they make their teeth blacke they plant trées which being cutte there issueth a white liquour like milke which changeth into a sweete gumme verie good to smell vnto They plant likewise other trees called Guareâ—ma whereof the fruit is like a Mulberie but somewhat harder whereof they make a certaine kinde of sodden Must which healeth colde and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire They haue another kind of high and sweete smelling trée which seemeth to be Cedar whereof the wood is verie good to make chests cases by reason of the sweetnesse of the wood good to keep things in but putting bread into them it becommeth so bitter that it is not to be eaten the wood is likewise good to make ships for that it neuer consumeth in the water by wormes or any other meanes There are other trees from whence they haue lime wherewith they gette birdes and annoint their bodyes therewith wherein they stick feathers The land of it selfe bringeth forth Cassia but they eate it not neither knowe how to vse it There are so many Roses and sweete flowers in that countrey that the smel thereof maketh mens heades to ake in smel exceeding muske wormes as grashoppers Caterpillers and such like there are verie manie which destroy the seed There are likewise vains of sea coles burning like pitch whereof they make great profite Thus much concerning the fruitfulnesse of the countrey their
to fight but to carry their necessaries prouisions and being in the field the ancientest among them such as haue slaine and eaten many of their enemies are appoynted for captaines and commaunders after whome the rest folowe and set forward towards the enemy and although they meete all together without order yet when they march they place themselues in rankes the strongest going before and the rest after them wherein it is strange that so manye men being together without a generall can so well place themselues and know when they should set forward There are some of them that blowe in great hornes like our trumpets which they call Inabia wherewith they incourage the people and giue them signes of battell others haue pipes or flutes made of their enemies bones which at other times they haue slaine and eaten whereon all the time of their march they cease not to pipe thereby to stirre their fellowes harts to do the like with their ennemies bones that by them should bee taken And if they assaile their enemies by water they keepe close to the shore not daring enter farre into the sea because their scutes which are made of the barkes of trees are not able to indure against a tempest but serue onely in calme weather eache scute holding fiftie men which may easily sitte therein and rowe with so great swiftnesse that it is wonderfull In the maner before rehearsed they trauel sometimes tenne or twelue miles within their enemies countrey vsing to march with their strongest men first leauing the weakest with the womē a day or two daies iourney behind them marching very quietly entring into certaine woods where they stay hide themselues for the space of half a day meane time if they meete with any of their enemies either men women or children they kéep them not prisoners neither take them with them but presently kil and rost them vpon their boncans or girdirons and so eate them which they do not to bee troubled with them when they should enter into the vilages of their enemies which are all without walles their houses being of 80. or 100. pases long without doores placing in steede thereof certayne Palme trees or branches of the hearb called Pindo yet there are some villages among them such as border vpon their enemies that are paled about with boordes of sixe foote high against the which when they meane to doe any exploit they watch the way that goeth vnto the village where such as issue foorth or enter in fighting with them are taken prisoners and are killed and eaten But when they meet in open field army against army it is done with such fury and horrible bloudshed that it is incredible as Ioannes Lerius a Burgonian hath personally beheld them can witnes from whome this is gathered for that they run with so great fiercenesse and boldnesse together as neuer was heard of for as Lerius writeth when the Tououpinambaultiers first perceiued their enemies they made so horrible a crie as greater is neuer heard among vs when we hunt the wolfe and that so lowde as if at that time it had thundred it could scarcely haue béene heard and approching nearer vnto them they beganne a second time to crie with blowing of hornes and piping on their flutes calling to their ennemies and shewing thē the dead bones of their frends and their teeth which they do weare about their neckes vpon strings at the least twoo elles long that done entring into battell and beginning to shoote you may see theyr arows flee into the ayre as thick as swarms of flies with all kinde of coloured feathers which maketh a most pleasant shew if it might be séen without danger in the which shooting whosoeuer is hurt presently pulleth sorth the arrow and like a madde dog biteth it in peeces yet hee leaueth not off but still fighteth as being so cruel and fierce that they neuer cease fighting as long as any strength is in their bodies neuer flying and such as they strike with their woodden holberts fal presently dead vnto the groūd like oxen that are kild by the butcher This manner of fight was séene by Lerius to bee done by the Tououpinam baultiers who after thrée houres fight had the victory and after many on both sides were slaine and wounded they brought about thirty men and women prisoners which they placed in the middle of their battell the strongest of them being tied with ropes which done they returned to the Créeke or entry or Ganabara of the which prisoners ten of them were bought and sent to Henry the second king of Fraunce Lerius himselfe bought a woman and her child and being with him he thinking to comfort her telling her hée would send her into France she aunswered him that she had rather be eaten by her enemies or to be let loose that she might once againe helpe to be reuenged on the ennemies that haue taken her wherein you may see how stiffely they are bent vnto reuenge neuer forgetting or forgiuing anie iniury whatsoeuer The manner how they vse their prisoners and what ceremonies they vse in the killing and eating them THe prisoners being brought home by such as haue taken them are not onelie well fed but they giue the men women to beare them company but not the women men to lie with them and which is more strange diuers of them that haue prisoners wil not refuse to giue him daughter or sister to wife which must liue truely and honestly with her husband and because they obserue no certaine time of the offerings or butcheries of their prisoners but somtimes sooner somtimes later as they thinke good therfore the men prisners are kept to hunt fish and catch birds and the women to garden plant and fish for oysters and when like swine they are fat and wel fed they are slaine and eaten in manner as followeth First they certifie all the neighbours round about when and in what place their feast shall be kept where there reforteth a great number both men women and children consuming all the forenoone with drinking among the which are the prisoners which know ful wel that it wil be vnto their costs all beset with feathers who not onely feareth not death but in dancing leaping and drinking excelleth all the rest in which maner hauing consumed at the least six or seauen houres two or thrée of the strongest among them lay hold vpon the prisoner and therewith bind him about the middle with cotten ropes or with the barks of a certain trée by them called Iuire which is like a Linden trée meane while hee standeth still and neuer resisteth them although both his armes hands are at libertie which done they leade him in that manner round about the village for euery man to see him he not once hāging down his head as those which in our countries are ready to be executed vse to do but to the contrary with an incredible boldnesse boasting of his déedes and telling them that
bodies as bigge as akornes hauing deepe rootes worse and more deformed than por and must be wroong off by binding a threed about them when they are ripe they paynt their mouthes and boare holes in theyr eares nose lippes and cheekes vpon their festiuall dayes wearing iewels and pearles therein the scutes by them vsed in those countries to fish as also to saile in are like drifts made of thrée fiue seuen nine and eleuen light quarters or rafters of wood laid or bound together as men binde mastes and let them driue vppon the water and their manner is to binde the longest in the middle and the rest on both sides shorter than other and as their driftes are long or short so are their sailes proportioned and when they haue brought their drift a good way forwarâ— they throwe bread fruit and such like things into the sea praying for a good winde as being weary and wholly without strength to rowe any more The doores of the Churches in that Countrey stand Eastward hanged with certaine cotton linnen and in euery church there standeth two grauen Images of forme like blacke Buckes and before them there is a fire made of swéete wood which groweth in that countrey which fire burneth continually out of the which wood the barke being taken away there issueth a certaine sweet gumme I thinke it to be Cedar from whence the gumme Elemi is taken which is accounted for the life of the dead and the death of the liuing because it preserueth the dead body from putrifaction There are also in those temples certain Images of great serpents which they pray vnto and besides these common idolles euery man hath his seuerall Idoll each man according to the trade he vseth as the Fishermen a greate fish and the Hunters a hart or the Image of some wilde beast by the Cape Passao in some churches vpon euery piller thereof were placed the bodies of men women and children crucified that were so well kept and dried that by no meanes they could rot or cast foorth any vnswéete sauour there were likewise the heads of Indians set vpon nailes which with some certaine substaunce they had so closed and knitte together that they were no bigger in compasse than a mans fist their houses are made of great thicke réedes which growe in that countrey but for fruite they haue very little Procéeding further to the description of the coast and folowing on south and southweast to Cape saint Elena before you come to that poynt there are two hauens one called Colao the other Calemgo where the shippes anker to take in fresh water and woodde to burne and from the poynt saint Laurence to Cape saint Elena are full nine miles and lieth vnder twoo degrees and from the point towardes the north it maketh a hooke of land which is a very good Hauen about a bowe shoote from thence there standeth a fountayne which by certaine veines runneth into the sea from whence there issueth a certayne Bitumen altogether like pitch and by the Spaniardes is vsed about their shippes insteede of tarre and the Peruuians say that about that point in times past there dwelt great men like Giants but they knew not from whence they came and fedde vppon such meate as their neighbours vsed specially fish Those Giauntes fished likewise vppon drifts and manye times came on foote to land through the water where they had at the least two fadome déepe and somewhat more They went naked and were most cruell killing many of the people thereabouts When the Spaniardes arriued at Porto Vero they found therein two Images of those Giantes a man and a woman and the Peruuians say likewise that the destruction of those Giauntes was done by a boy that came downe from heauen shining like the Sunne that fought against them with fiery flames in such manner that where the flames touched they tare and rent the stones the rents and holes whereof are at this day to be seene and by that meanes the Giauntes ranne into certayne holes to hide themselues where they were all destroyed This tale was not greatly beléeued by the Spaniardes vntill one Iohn de Helmos borne in Truxillio Gouernour of Porto Vero in the yeare of our Lorde God euerlasting one thousand fiue hundred fourtie and thrée caused certayne places to bee digged vppe where they found so great bones and ribbes that it was incredible to bee mens bones but that they found the heads lying by them the teeth thereof being three fingers broad and foure fingers long and fiue quarters square which were sent into diuers places of Peru and from that time the Peruuians tale thereof was beleeued to be true The Spaniards opinions are that because the Giantes were giuen to sinne against the lawes of nature that the most righteous God had destroyed them by his Angel with fire from heauen as he did the Citties of Sodome and Gomorrha Yet is this not certainely to be credited because the Americans haue no histories bookes nor other writings to record the same onely the memories and rehearsalles of menne from time to time and by some tokens and memorialles there made of all sortes of painted cotten ropes which they call Quippos signifying by the number of knottes made of diuers fashions that which they would remember beginning from the bottome and so telling vpwardes from one to tenne and so forth painting the ropes of the same colour that the things were of which they woulde thereby signifie or haue in memorie whereof the Spaniardes by their Barbarian crueltie and negligence haue spoyled great numbers in euery prouince there were menne appoynted for the purpose in that manner to register such things as had happened as you may reade more at large in the Historie of Mexico those that did it were caled Quippo camayos of which cordes there were whole houses full which by such as were acquainted with them could easily be tolde although the things had béene done many yeeres before but returning againe to the description of the coast from the point of saint Elena you saile to the riuer of Tumbez which lieth almost nineteene miles off and from thence about foure miles lieth the Islande Pâ—na otherwise called the Island of Saint Iacob which is more than seuen miles and one half in compasse very rich and inhabited with so many people that they warred continually with the men of Tumbez and the people of the firme land betweene them hauing had many battells in open field but by continuaunce of tune and power of the Spaniardes they were in the ende wholely subdued This Island is very fruitful and ful of al sorts of trees abounding both with wilde beastes and fish also of fresh water for their apparel they vsed shirts and other clothes they fish with drifts of light wood bound vpon two other peeces of woodde as their neighbors do of the which drifts some of them are so great that at the least fiftie men and three horses might sit vpon them
twelue Italian miles and from thence the coast runneth south wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point there is a great intercourse or creeke of water hauing very good harber for shippes to anker in it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line from thence you perceiue 2. Islands both called Islas de Lobos that is Islandes of Sea Wolues because of the great quantity that are thereabouts the first of these Islands lyeth north and south with the first poynt and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles or 12. Italian miles the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward and is not ful vnder seuen degrees southwest from the coast till you come to the hauen called Câ—sma and from this first Island you saile northeast southwest to Malabrigo which is the slender or bad defence where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter but with faire weather and such specially as haue great occasion thereby to further their voyage Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarrâ—eâ—sse that is the cliffe of Truxilio which is a verie bad hauen and hath no other harber or defence then onely good ankers and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio which is also one of the Spanish townes situate in the plaine countrie of Peru it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull abounding in wheat Mâ—lâ— cattell and water and the towne built in good proportion hauing about three hundred Spanish houses with broade streetes and a great market place rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens and euerie house is serued with water by channels comming out of the Riuer and runneth into all their gardens which are continually greene and full of blossomes wherfore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes corne fieldes and Pastour groundes where the inhabitants feede their Cattell and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plaÌ„ted many kinds of spanish fruites as porâ—gaâ—nats oranges lemones citrons figs much of the countrie fruit in great aboundance and verie good besides this they haue many foules hens and capons whereby they are prouided of all things of flesh in great aboundance and fish out of the sea which is hard by them also in the riuer The Indians inhabiting about the towne are in subiection to the Spaniards and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen made by the Indians to sell in other places This towne was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto the first gouernour of Peru in the yeare 1533 From Truâ— by land vnto saint Michaeâ— another spanish towne and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes are about fiue and fortie spanish miles or an hundred and eightie Italian miles litle more or lesse for that comming from Saint Michaeâ—s to the vallie Motupâ— are fifteene miles and a halfe all sandie and bad way specially where men much cheefely trauell and being past those fifteene miles you enter into certaine vallies and though therabouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles yet they reach not to the vallies but runne into the sands whereby they doo no good and to trauaile this way you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening and so go all night and earlie in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt some carrie bottles with water or wine and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway very broad euen which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru I will declare more at large This vallie is broade and fruitfull but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish there groweth many trees the people draw their waterout of certaine pits which they dig within the earth their traffike is cotten wool and cloth made thereof three miles from Motupe lyeth the faire fresh vallie of Xaâ—anca which is also three miles great through the which there â—unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds this vallie in time past was very populous and likewise the other in this vallie were many houses of great Lords that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people from this vallie you goe to another called â—uqueme which likewise is great and full of bushes the ruines of the great houses that stood therin yet to bée séene do euidently shew that many people haue inhabited in that vallie a dayes iourney further there is yet another faire vallie called â—â—nto and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes and drie stony hils where you findâ— neither liuing creatures trees nor leaues but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it and such as will passe that way must haue good guides lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes and by reason of the great heate of the sun and want of water should faint for thirst From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name this vally likewise in times past was full of people but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres they are almost consumed from whence you goe to Zana much like the â—ormer and somewhat further to Palcamayo of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous the people of this vallie before they were ouercome and subdued by the â—ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours they had great churches wherein they sacrificed but now al destroyed and ouerthrowne there were likewise many Indians graues Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer that watereth al their groundes and through it also passeth the kings high way and therein were many houses belonging to the king In this vallie they make much cotten work haue al kind of cattel as kine hogs goates and such like beasts and is verie temperate From this vallie you go to another called Cancama not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers made by Dom di S. Themafe and three miles from thence in the vallie of Câ—â—â—o lieth Tâ—uxâ—lâ— as I said before which valâ—â—e keepeth the name of a Lorde called Câ—â—o who was a valiant Souldiour and liued long time 〈◊〉 warres The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure and through it also passeth the kings high way
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
occasion of the droughts and of the other townes and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts from Lyma to Arequipa I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru lying on the sea side where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine because the Sea which commonly yeeldeth moysture lyeth vpon the one side and the hils whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow vppon the other side you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer beginneth in Aprill and continueth May Iune Iuly August and September and in October winter beginneth and continueth the other moneths til March not much differing from our Countries or froÌ„ Spain in that time they both plant build and gather in their fruites and seedes but day and night are al of a length onely that in Nouember they differ a little and in the plaine land it is contrary for when it is summer in the hils it is winter there so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in October and continueth til the moneth of Aprll where as then winter beginneth and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey where a man may vppon one day in the morning trauaile from the hilles where it raineth and befoâ—e night bee in the plaine countrie where it neuer or verye seldome raineth for that from the beginning of October al the summer long it neuer raineth in that countrey onely there falleth certain dew which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes wherefore the inhabitants of the plaine countrey must continually water their groundes and not till nor plant any more lande then they can bring the water vnto in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country there is no grasse as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds the trees growing theron are vnfruitfull with verie few leaues there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes and in some places nothing at all when it is winter in the plaine countrie there are certaine thicke and close cloudes onely as if the aire hung full of raine from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling that can hardly lay the dust of the sande which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close there falleth no other moysture and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds cannot be seene and as the hilles are verie high and the coast low it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course it raineth much in the hils and not in the plaine countrie but therein causeth a great heat and when the dew falleth then it is cleare weather vpon the hils and raines not there likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain countrie that is southwest windes which although in other countries they are commonly moyst and causes of raine there they are cleane contrarie I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles from whence they blow that they draw no moysture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire wherby any great raine should folow by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru both against winde and streame in such sort that it cannot be done without lauering and striuing against the winde There is yet another thing to bee marked which is that vnder the line in some places it is moyst and in some places colde and moyst and in those plaine countries of Peru colde and drie and departing from thence to the other side it raineth continually Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru with the hauens and riuers lying therein between the towne of Lyma and the prouince of Dechia as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings take their course towards the south and so come to the hauen of Singalla which is verie great whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place it lyeth distant from Lyma 2â— Spanish miles or 105. Italian miles whereof fiue make a Duch mile which is one and twentie Duch miles it lyeth not ful vnder fourteene degrees on the south side of the line Hard by the hauen of Sangalta lyeth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolues al the coast from thence forward is very low although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone and some sandie downes wherein as yet neither before nor til this time it euer rained where also there falleth no other moysture then onely the smal dewe whereof I spake before about this Island of sea Wolues there are seuen or eight other Islandes which lie in Triangle wherof some are high some low and all vnhabited hauing neither water wood trees grasse nor any thing onely Sea Wolues and great store of sande The Peruuians of the firme land as they theÌ„selues say in times past vsed to goe into those Islands and there to offer sacrifices where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden these Islands are distant from the firme land about three miles Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1 â— lyeth another Island of the same name and from thence sailing on and coasting along the shore southwest and southwest and by south and being 9. miles beyond the Island you come to a point called Nasca lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker but yet they cannot land with their boates neither throw foorth their Bocken following the same course vnder fifteene degrees 1 â— there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas and from this cape the coast runneth southwest and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort you come to a hauen called Hacan which lyeth vnder sixteene degrees from whence following on the coast you come to the riuer Diocouna on which side the coast is altogether wilde A little further there is another riuer called Camana and somewhat further the riuer Quilca and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker which hauen is also called Quilca like the riuer and from thence as men put out they saile to the towne of Arequipa which lyeth 12. miles from this towne the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½ sayling along the coast of this hauen about three miles distant you see certaine Islands in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo
Church and keepe the rest for themselues and you must vnderstand that all the offerings must be wrought with golde and siluer and of such forme and fashion as the thing is which they desire to haue of their Guaca They offer also liuing men and all kindes of beastes looking in the hearts and intrailes of the men or beastes which they did offer for certaine secret tokens which if they founde not vpon the offerings they still offered newe men or beasts vntil they founde the tokens thinking the Idoll not to be pleased with such offrings as had them not When the priests should offer sacrifices then they abstaine from the company of their wiues and ceased not all night to doo nothing but crie out and pray to the diuell running into the fieldes and to the places where the Guacas stande whereof there were so many that euerie man hadde one before his dore and the day before they should speake with the diuell they fasted some binding a thing before their eies and some thrust them cleane out and it hath often bene seene that some of them haue done it of meere deuotion The kinges and noble menne enterprise not any thing before they haue consulted with the Priestes and the Priests with the Idoles in their sacrifices they vse not onely beastes but menne and children but they eate not mans flesh as the Caniballes do When the Spaniardes spoyled their Temples they founde therein many pottes full of the dried bones and flesh of dead children that had bin offered to their Idolles they offer likewise birdes and other beastes and with the bloud of their offerings they annoint the mouthes of their Idolles and the dores of their churches There was likewise among the golde that lay by their idolles certaine staues and myters for Bishops such as our Bishops vse when they are in their robes or as the Painters vse to set foorth Saint Nicholas with his Crosse and Myter and being asked what those things meant they knew not what to answere neyther from whence they came Besides those great temples of the Sunne and Guacas there were in all places of the countrey of Peru many other Churches and Cloysters for yong maides wherein some had one hundred some two hundred and some more al obseruing chastitie or at the least vowing to keepe it and to honour the Sunne like the Vastal virgins in Rome or our Nuns Those they called Mamacomas and were bound to stay in the cloyster during their liues and neuer to depart from thence dooing nothing but spinne weaue and sowe very fine cloth of cotten and wooll apparell and furnitures for their Idolles or as others affirme the clothes by them made were burnt with the bones of white sheepe the ashes whereof as a signe and token of godly honour they threw into the ayre against the Sunne Those maides were verye narrowely looked vnto by certaine Priestes and other men appoynted for the purpose wherof some were gelded because they should not seeke to defile them which if the maides once committed they were eyther put to death or buried quicke but if the maide with childe would take her othe that it was begotten by the Sunne then the childe was free from death and euerye yeere in the moneth of August when they had gathered in their corne or maiz the Perâ—uians that dwelt in the hilles made a great feast they set vp in the middle of their Market place two great hie trees like our Maie-poles and in the top of them they placed certaine Images made like men compassed about with flowers and so in roundes yet in good order comming thither they strike vp drummes throwing and showting one after the other with stones and arrowes at those Images making great noyse with whooping and hallowing and euery man hauing shott and thrown The Priests brought an other Image which was set belowe on the neather part of the trees whereunto they offered either a man or a sheepe annoynting the Image with the bloud thereof and after they perceiued the tokens in the heart or intrailes they certified it vnto the people and the tokens being found the feast was ended eyther with ioy or sadnes most part in drinking wherunto they are much addicted and so daunced turning and passing vnder each others armes each man hauing either a bill clubbe or some other weapon in his hand such as are desirous to know more of their ceremonies and false worshippings of Idoles let them reade the histories of the Spanish Indies The countrey of Peru was first ruled by Iudges which are Kings or Rulers that come from the great lake called Titicara or as some write Titicaca lying in Charcas being foure score miles in compasse which runneth westward through a great riuer which in some places is halfe a mile broad and then runneth into an other small lake fortie miles distant and it is to be wondered at how the abundaunce of water that runneth out of the great lake is comprehended in so small a place where it is not once perceiued to increase The lake beeing so small and the water so great but it is reported that in that lake there is no botome or ground and that the water runneth vnder the ground thorow the earth into another sea or riuer as it is saide of the riuer Alpheus that it runneth from Peioponces or Moica to Cicilia vnder the ground and from this lake or thereabouts the kings of Peru had their originall the petegree of which kings is by Iacob Fernando a Spaniard declared in this manner Frst Mango Capa who according to the Indians report was not borne of a woman but sprang out of a stone which vntill this day is yet shewne by them about the towne of Cusco hee by his wife Mama Guaco had issue one sonne called Sicheroca that ruled after his father and was the second Ingen or king you must vnderstand that the inheritance of the kingdome continueth in the issue sons successiuely and not vnto the children of the sonnes before all the brothers haue raigned one after another but first the eldest sonne is King then after his death his second brother succeedeth in the kingdome and not the eldest brothers sonnes and the second brother dying there being no more brethren the crowne falleth vnto the eldest brothers sonnes without alteration or change this Sicheroca was a valiant souldier like his father and broght many of his neighbours to subiection and by Mama Cura he had issue a sonne called Locuco Pangue the third king who studied rather to holde those landes he had vnder his subiection then to win or increase more vnto them and being aged he married a wife Mama Anauerque by whom he had a sonne called Maita Capa that augmented his kingdome and thervnto ioyned the prouince of Cusco and by his wife Mama Iacchi Dela he had issue a sonne called Capa Cyupangu of whom there is nothing worthy memory onely that he left a sonne by his wife Mama Cagna called Inga
Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compasse a stryke and a half Northeastward and when it is an hower after twelue of the Clocke by the compasse it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelue of the Clocke and to know when you are hard by the Ilandes you shall find it by this that you shall see certaine Birds flying fiue and fiue in ranks together then you are hard by them and from thence forward certaine birdes will follow you by the Portingales called Feigions full of blacke and white spottes whereby they are easy to bee knowne béeing South and North ouer this Iland you shall see certaine thinges driue in the sea by the Portingalles called Sargoslo and is almost like the weedes that is found by Vieâ—inghen in Holland From these Ilandes of â—rulan de Cunha to the cape de bona Speranza being in this countrie about the eight of Iune you shall see in driuing the sea certaine weedes called Sargollo and Trombas like peeces of thicke reedes those reedes are short and full of branches and are not so long as those that are found by the Cape de bona Speranza here you must kéepe on your course till you finde them to increase and be not abashed thereat for it commeth by this meanes that the more it stormeth and is foule weather in the Ilands the more of those reedes weedes are smitteÌ„ down which w t the water the wind that commeth both from behind and ouer the Iland driue towardes the Cape de bona Speranza wherefore I aduertise you that if you find those réedes and weedes to keepe 150. miles further from the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha for they are signes of that I told you of before When you come vnder the hight of 35. degrees full or scarse to the Cape de bona Speranza you shall see Trombas or péeces of thicke reedes in the water and when you see them assure your selfe they come from the Cape de bona Speranza and you are then past those of the Ilands when you find those Trombas then you are but 3â— or â—0 miles from the Cape de bona speranza Those peeces of reedes are long almost like Basuynen but when you are vnder 35. degrées and a half then you see them no more but certaine birds as great as Rauens with white and flat billes with blacke feathers those flie not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza and some gray birdes by the Portingalles called Alcatiases these are the right tokens you finde from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas you must likewise vnderstand that the trauersing or crosse way from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza is much shorter or lesse theÌ„ is placed in the sea cards but let no man seeke to know the cause thereof as hauing no great matter consisting therein coÌ„cerning the vosage though there were yet it is not coÌ„uenient y t other nations and strangers should vnderstand it you find likewise betwéen the Ilands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza certaine sea wolues but being in that couÌ„try about the last of Iune it may be you shal not sée them for then they withdraw themselues from thence because of the cold kéepe vnder the land but if you chaÌ„ce to be by those IlaÌ„ds of Tristan de Cunha about the 10 of May then you shal not passe aboue 35 degrées because at that time the West windes do there blow w t most great fury tempests specially with a new Moone least it happen to you as it did to the shippe called the Bon Iesus which was ouerwhelmed in the sea by the great waues that the windes raised as I my self sayth Diego Afonso haue seene beeing in the shippe called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza y t shall sée certaine birds in the water called Antenas which are great speckled fowle then you are by Cape das Agulhas you shall likewise finde some fish bones or cuttle bones such as the Goldsmithes vse driuing vppon the water and when you haue the sight of land vnder the degrees aforesaid beeing thirtie miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza as also comming vnder the 36. degrées you shall finde those birdes called Antenales and when you are past the Cape de Bona Speranza and haue séene land whether it be y e Cape de Bona Speranza or the cape das Agulhas either beyond or on this side then kéepe aloofe from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea and if you meane to goe to Mosambique then you must saile North East that is to the Baixos or droughts of India In the course from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza many birdes follow after you but as soone as you come within y e sight of the cape de bona Speranza they leaue you manie times the blacke Rauens aforesaid that you may be sure to be within the Cape that is on the east side of India you shall perceiue the waues of the sea that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West doe presentlie leaue you as soone as you are past the Cape das Agulhas inwardes vntill you come to others out of the South West that is inward from the Cape also by this Cape the needle of the compasse is right and euen so that when it is noone by the Astrolobie it is likewise noone by the sunne diall or the compasse both agréeing in one which is a good signe that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas or betweene both that is the Cape de Bona Speranza and the Cape das Agulhas and this is a great signe as well from Portingall into India as from India to Portingall but sayling from Portingall to India then the néedle of the compasse turneth Northeastward again 30 miles froÌ„ the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique The coast runneth East and West and you must bee carefull being past the Cape das Agulhas sixe or seauen miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras not to take the way towardes the Cape but towardes the South West and South West and by West because it is necessarie so to doe to saue a great deale of way by reason of the streames and waters that runne inwardes towardes the land If it chance you passe the Cape a farre off and so see not any of these signes theÌ„ take the height of the sunne and looke on your diall but you must doe it aduisedly and with a straight thread and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward it being noone by the Astrolabie The shadow of the sunne diall will not be vpon noone but wil want a strike and when it is noone by the diall then it will be halfe a degree past the Astrolabe which if you find to be so then assure your selues you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona
Speranza or das Agulhas and marke it well for you shall finde it to be true and when you set your course to saile within the Island of saint Laurence you shall find some small white birdes in companies together they flie about twentie miles from the land towardes the droughtes of India and comming vnder twenty degrees you shall most certainely find the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases that are like Sea-mewes then you hold a good course and if you sée not any of those tokens looke well to your selfe for thē you are hard by the Island of S. Laurence or vpon the banks of the coast of Soffala and séeing many birdes you are but 10 miles from the droughtes of India then take your course North East and North East by North and so hold on till you come vnder 19. degrees and ¼ and from thence Sayle North East till you bee in eightéene degrées from thence you shall runne North and North and by East till you come to sixteene degrées and ¾ beeing vnder those degrees and séeing many birdes called Alcatrases in companies of 6.7.8 or 10. then you are but ten or fifteene miles from the Island of Ioan de Noua therefore vse all diligence both by day and night not to come néere it specially when it is with a new moone and saile North westward and then you will come by the Islandes named dos Angoxes and the more northward you run you shall keepe the better course towardes Mosambique being carefull not to come neerer the land then twentie fiue fadomes déepe for the coast is altogether droughtes shallowes where on Don Iohn Periera was cast away and yet is thirteene fadome déepe round about The 3. Chapter The Nauigation from Cauo das Correntes to the droughts called os Baixos de India from thence to Mosambique AND if you chance to sée the cape das Correntes being 6. or 7. miles from you and minding to saile to Mosambique then saile East Northeast hauing a sharpe wind and comming vnder 22. degrées vnder the which height the droughtes of India lie You shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus flying in companies and if you haue a full wind then saile Northeast to the height aforesaide to know if you be néere vnto the droughts you shall sée many of the birdes called Garagiaus and Alcatrases flying together and if you sée many Alcatrases then you are néere the droughts but séeing the Garagiaus alone without Alcatrases then you are twentie fiue miles from thence Frō thence you must saile Northeast and Northeast by North to 19. degrées and 1 ◠and then saile Northeast to 18. degrees and from thence north north and by East to 16. degrées and 1 ◠and beeing vnder this height you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases and so assure your selfe to be hard by the Island of Ioan de Noua and if you see Alcatrases by 6. or 7. together then you are but 10. or 15. miles from thence because there they vse to fetch their foode therefore vse all diligence to get your selues out of that height of the Island which is 16 degrées and 1 ◠and to bee out of danger sayle Northwest whereby you come to the Islands of Angoxas which are close by the coasts towards Mosambique and the more Northerly you kéepe the nearer you come to Mosambique but as you sayle from the Islands of Angoxas to Mosambique beware you come not nearer then 25. fadome to y e Corals where Don Ioan Perreira was cast away and yet round about it is thirtéene fadomes water beeing past the Islandes of Angoxas Northeast then saile Northeast by East which is a good course alwaies kéeping at twenty fiue fadome as I said before The courses aforesaid from Cabo das Correntes forwards may bee done nearer and shorter if you haue the wind Southeast for then you may sayle along by the Islands lying vpon the bankes of Solfala the sooner to Mosambique and with an east wind vnder the degrées and with the signes aforesaide you must likewise shun the drought of India and the bankes of the Island of S. Laurence that lye towardes the drougths of India betwéen those two droughts it is 95. fadome deepe and if you desire to enter into the road of Mosambique in the entrance you must passe by the two Islands of S. George S. Iames and leaue them on the southwest side keepe aloofe from S. George about six or seuen fadome déepe and so running forward til you be in hauing care to keepe off from the bankes where you sée the water breake till you come close before the Island and fortresse of Mosambique The 4. Chapter The Nauigation from Mosambique to India WHEN you depart from Mosambique towardes India then saile Northeast whereby you shall discouer the Islande Alha da Comoro which is distant from Mosambique 94. miles or 11 degrées and ½ whereof the furthest point Northward is a verie high land 15. miles from thence you shall sée certaine birdes called Rabo◠de Iuncos that is tayles of stalkes of berries for that they haue a long narrow taile stretching out like the stalke of a berrie and by night you shall heare the birdes called Garagiaus sing or make a noyse following your course from this Iland or towards India you must vnderstand as soone as you discouer the vttermost point of the Iland of Saint Laurence towardes the North that the water and streames run North and Northwest toward the Cape of Guardafu and to the mouth or entrie of the straightes of Mecco or the redde sea and you must marke that if it chance that you sayle with a halfe winde and shoot full or sayle before the winde yet therefore you must not recken according to the course you hold but alwaies take a strike for abatement or cutting off and being by the winde two strikes because the water and streame driue you continually to the Northwest and looke wel before you that if you find many heights it is by reason y e water driues you as I said before to be assured to fal vpon the coast of India you must take héede to the needle of your compasse that yéeldeth a strike and more to the Northeast and if you recken your course according to the way the shippe maketh then you lose all that which the néedle or compasse yéeldeth towards the Northeast and that which the water driueth you towards the Northwest whereby you come too short and cannot get the coast of India The streame or drawing of the water towards the redde sea is from 4. to 7. degrées wherefore you must alwaies haue great care to be forward and not to come to short In those countries you shall alwayes sée many of the birds called Rabos de Iuncos and when you are néere vnto the coast and droughtes of Pandua then you see them no more but onely about 5◠miles in the sea you shal perceiue diuers
the Compasse that in Portingall lyeth halfe a strike Northeast maketh the same Meridian 100. and so many myles within the countrey of Brasilia which also likewise doth so agrée with the sea In this course aforesaide you see many birdes called Rabos Forcados that is hanging tailes and by all the Islandes of Martin Vaas you shal sée white Garagiaus or sea Mewes Now when you come vnder the height aforesaide hauing a large winde and that you might saile East Southeast let the Compasse wind a strike or a strike and a halfe which will wind so much comming vnder 30. degrées and although the Compasse windeth a strike and a halfe yet you shall not therefore reckon any abatement in your course more then halfe a strike for this way is a strike shorter then it is placed in the sea Carde and vse all the meanes that you runne not higher then two and thirtie or 33. degrées towards the Island of Tristan da Cunha for you shal haue a better and surer course from very foule weather and lesse stormes for commonly for the most part you haue the winde there at North Northeast which to auoid take this counsel giueÌ„ by me because I haue well tried it to be true and comming by the aforesaide Islandes of Tristan de Cunha you shall sée some of the weed called Sargosso driuing vppon the water with diuers Trombas which are thicke peeces of reedes which when you see then you are beside the Islandes you shall there likewise see great sea Rauens and some small Rauens with white billes which flie close by the Islands and when you are right south and north with the Islandes then the winding of the compasse Northeastward beginneth to diminish and lieth but a strike and â— part for that 70. or 80. miles from this Iland you are in the middle or halfe way of the Meridian betweene Brasilia and the Cape das Agulhas also herewith you must vnderstaÌ„d that vnder the height of 35. degrees little more or lesse you must account 330. miles for each strike of the compasse from the Northeast and when you see the tokens aforesaid you must runne to 35. degrees and â— which is a good height holding your course east and east and by north till you be within 100. miles of the cape de Bona Speranza then the compasse will winde no more but â— part of a strike likewise the water wil there draw you northwest or north now if by negligence you chance to faile or by the windes are driuen vnder 35 degrees then when you are 30 or fortie miles from the cape de Bona Speranza you shall see many thicke peeces of reedes and sea wolues which being vnder 36. degrees you shall not see bee it full or scarse and comming within 40. miles of the Cape de Bona Speranza be it vnder 36. or 35. degrées you shall see a gathering or running together of the water that is in the day time for by night if you cannot see it because that when you are once in it then you cannot perceiue it there you find many birdes sitting vpon it by the Portingalles called Cauoitoijns and from thence to the Cape there are some sea Rauens with white billes which is a great signe for it may be you may find ground and neuer sée the birdes called Alcatrases and when you come North and South with the Cape de bona Speranza from fiue and thirtie to thirtie degrées then you shall find muddie grounde to the Cape das Agulhas and when you are past that muddie ground you shall finde a kinde of yellowish ground and somewhat more inwarde by the Cape das Vacquas which is towards the Agua de de San Bras you haue shelly and stone ground The Compasse as I said that is fire at the Cape das Agulhas must in Lisbone be marked or striked and must there lie a halfe strike Northeastward which they must very well know howe to marke although some of our Pilots thinke it not necessary to knowe how much the Compasse turneth or lyeth Northeast or Northwest saying that our predecessors vnderstoode not the Compasse and so marked the coast whereunto I answere that in some nauigations it may be excused but in most part of the voiage or nauigation it is very necessarie specially from the Northeast and Northwest as you must saile from the Cape de bona Speranza to Mosambique as wel in the course as to saile in the middle betwéen the Ilande of Saint Laurence Soffala it must haue a strike from the Northwest to saile in the middle of the channell and this is necessarie to be known by al pylots that saile to India because oftentimes they find themselues sometimes vpon the Islandes some-that by meanes of the streames and wa-times vppon the bankes of Soffala and ters as you take your course from Capo das Agulhas to Mosambique it is good to saile an hundred miles Eastward thereby to shun the coast because of the water and streames that runne southwestwarde and comming north and south with the Bay called Balâ—a Del Goa then the Needle of the Compasse will be 1 â— part of a strike and no lesse Northwestwarde from whence notwithstanding you must not goe néerer then 60. miles vnto the coast continuing your course as I sayde before to kéepe your selfe off from it from this place the Rauens with white billes will follow you vntill the Cape das Correntes be Northwest from you and so when the said Cape lyeth right vppon that strike then the Rauens will leaue you for that they are not found but from the Cape das Correntes to the Cape de bona Speranza being North and south with the point aforesaid then the Compasse will bee 1\â— of a strike rather more then lesse Northwestwarde and in the middle of the channell a whole strike Comming by the droughts of Os Baixos de Iudia being Westward from them or not séeing theÌ„ then you shall sée many of the birdes called Alcatrases that being 10. or 15. miles from them but being 20. miles off on the same side you shall likewise sée some but the compasse will not winde a full strike but if you were on the side of the Iland of S. Laurence within 10.12 or 15. miles then peraduenture you may not sée them and when in the height of those droughtes which lie full vnder 28. degrées you sée the birdes called Alcatrases then passe not by the side of the Iland of S. Laurence for that on that side towards the Iland you shall not see them but hard by and on Soffala side you shal perceiue them 20. miles from the land this is to bee vnderstood at the time of the Monsons which is at the time that the Portingall shippes that depart from thence in the month of March do passe by for they that come in the Monson or winter time may possiblie not find them for that it happened vnto me that comming in the Monson of winter in companie
halfe it is a small ryuer beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe and for a marke hath a high trée standing on the South side and along the shore some Sandie dounes which in sight shew like Ilands without trées on the North side lie certaine shallowes you enter into the Hauen Northwest on that is on the side where the trées stand and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fadome déepe Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vnder 20. degrées and a halfe and on the South side hath a high Palme trée and the land on the same side is like a hooke and if you desire to put into Quiloane although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes you may well doe it being high water but you must take heede of a drougth lying thrée myles from the Hauen This Hauen at high water is fiue Fadome déepe and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water with muddie ground you enter therein West Southwest and Southwest and by West and the drougthes aforesaide lie East Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane From Mataca or Mâ—nemone to Quiloane you shall see land at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe then you shall be fifteen myles from the land shall find Corall vpon the ground and from thence inward small sands sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East without the poynt or hooke til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe and till you sée Soffala and if you desire to stay there then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome which is 6. or 7. miles from the land the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare therefore you can not put into it without one of the countrie Pilots and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side sailing froÌ„ thence to Mosambique you must runne East till you come to fourty fadome water and from thence East north east running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast find smal thinne blacke sand mixed with the earth although you sayle close in sight of the land Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½ and the riuer of Cuama vnder eightéene and â— 4 and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama North East and South West beeing thirtie myles and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama to take in fresh water you must enter with a small Boate for within it is all fresh water from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras you runne along the coast east and West and somewhat East and by north and West and by South There are two sights of land and beeing vnder eighteene degrees you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small the course is fiftie miles The Riuer called Dos Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾ and hath these markes that is vppon the North east syde at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes there is a sand Hill or Downes which farre off sheweth like an Iland the entrie is on the South West syde along by the sand the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water you can not see the entrie as you are without but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land that hath a heape of trees standing vppon it which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe and the neerer you drawe to the land the lesse you see thereof so that beeing in the Riuer you see nothing at all because it is hindered by the other branches The Channell of the Ilandes Primenas and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one and you sayle East North east and West south west and it is 30 myles with tenne or twelue fadome deepe and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind you may freelie inough goe close vnto it for it is deepe and passing good ground The first of y e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees ½ if you desire to run betwéene them then runne Southwest from the Iland and you shall freelie enter the chanell without feare for it is déepe inough for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland and if you desire to put in there with a west wind then goe close to the Iland running to the middle therof towards the south syde where you may anker within the length of a great shot at 6 or 7 fadome déepe and desiring to passe either in or out betwéene the droughtes which lie Northeast you may very well doe it and though you beare all your sayles kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland then to the droughthes in the middle Iland for it is all one vpoÌ„ what syde of the Iland you sayle for there is no cause of feare but onlie where you sée the water breake and desiring to anker by the middle Iland you may fréely doe it and that close by it for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind but not with an East wind in the middle way on that side which lyeth against the firme land there standeth a heape of trees by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you if necessitie requireth and lyeth a little inward from the strand and if you can not well goe farre inward to the lake doe but digge in the strand and you shall presentie find fresh water but it must be when it is an east wind for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore that you are not able to stay there with your boate The middle Iland which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles and is all one course with the Ilandes you may fréelie passe by the land with what shippe so euer you will for it is déepe inough all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares one running through the other al déep and good ground so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land at the least eight fadome déepe but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides These Ilandes of Angoxas are 4 and betwéen the two middle
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant Northeast Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
you shall haue Pulo Sambilao right against it so you fall not from the Islandes towards Samatra holding your course as aforesaide towardes Pulo Sambilao without feare because the monson or time of the windes do as then blow from the land into the Sea and if herein you chaunce to bee negligent you shall doe your selfe great hurt and procure great hinderance in your Voyage the depthes and ground that you finde from the Island of d'Aru to Pulo Sambilao and from 27. to 40. fadome muddie ground and in some places sand and passing by the Iland of d'Aru then you find from 40. to 50. fadome déepe from the Islandes of Pulo Sambilao to th Islands of Pulo Pinao you shall kéepe along by the shore not once putting from it shunning a banke lying right ouer against the land called Barus betwéene Pulo Sambilao and Pulo Pinao which is muddie ground and it is saide that there you haue thrée fadome water you shall still vse your lead and runne not nearer then fiftéene fadome to the land nor further then thirtie fadome to Sea ward because diuers times there commeth great blasts out of the hilles of Queda from Northeast and north northeast and sometimes sharper many times runne further from the coast as I said before and so you shall holde your course without danger from the coast of the Iland Samatra where in the monson you haue greatest cause to feare and therefore you shall hold your course without putting from the land till you come to the Island of Pulo Pinao and being by them or at the heigth and length of them and hauing the monson that is the winde which as then bloweth and is good for you you may then put from the land doing your best to kéepe too loofeward off Pulo Pera which is a good course but if the winde serue you to make towards Pulo Batum it is better for from this place you must take your course towards the channell vnder 7. degrées and ½ but hauing the monson as aforesaid although it be somewhat backeward you shall loose your time for the monson at the first is sometimes sharpe and after that beginneth to be larger as you turne or winde from the land or coast With this course you shall runne to the channell and passe it vnder seauen degrées and ◠2 and before you come vnder seauen degrées and 1 2 to seauen and 2 ◠or lesse hauing past the Ilands you shall alwaies kéepe vnder the aforesaide seauen degrees and ½ because in that gulfe or countrie many times the winde is north and north Northeast in your course towards the Island of Seylon you shall runne vnder seauen degrees and ½ and vnder seauen degrees with the which you shall come to the Island of Seylon to a place called Matecalou which lieth too loofeward off the sands there you haue no ground but within two miles of the land you must likewise vnderstand that from the middle of the Gulfe to the Island of Seylon the water and the streames in this time of monson runne outward into the sea likewise the compasse yéeldeth more to the Northwest whereunto you must haue great regard and béeing at the Island Seylon hauing it in sight you shall not loose it but kéep your ground from thirtie fadome looking well before you and taking heede of the droughtes that are very dangerous the foremost of them béeing of stone Cliffes the length of a Galley without any other then only those you sée to fourtéene and sixtéene fadome and in the halfe way or middle thereof and the land you shall finde the depth aforesaid and another Sand that lyeth behind you which is the first and cannot bee séene but that the Sea breaketh vppon it and they say you may passe with small Shippes betweene it and the land béeing foure fadome déepe but I thinke it is better to put from it to sea ward it is from thence to the land a mile and you may goe neare it at sixtéene eightéene fadome and if you fall vppon it by night you must saile onlie with your Foukesayle when you are in sight of vnknowne land kéeping at eightéene fadome neare the land and not aboue thirtie fadome to Seaward from this sand you shall runne along y e coast at fiftéene sixtéene twentie twentie fiue and thirtie fadome but in such manner that you loose not ground for you may haue a Calme and so by that loosing of ground the water and streames might driue you to the Islandes of Maldiua wherefore you must haue good regard vntill you come to Negumbo which is in the Island of Seylon and from thence it is good to crosse ouer to the Firme land and comming to Negumbo you shall not put off from the land vnlesse it bee from the fiftéene of Februarie for from that time forwardes then the streame and waters beginne againe to runne inwardes and being from the fiftéene of Februarie forwardes you may put from the shore that is from the Island of Verberyn which lyeth close vppon the Coast of Seylon to the Portingales Fort called Columbo as it falleth out best for you least it happen to you as it hath done to many other shippes that for want of care were driuen to the Ilands of Maldyua from this last sand to Tanadare and to the poynt called A Punta de Gualla along the Coast and sea side the Countrie is almost all of one higth and right ouer against the sandes aforesaid inwards to the land you see 3 high trees and from thēce to Tanadare you haue sandie strands and you may still runne along the shore without feare till you sée Tanadare which is verie well knowne and deceaue not your self for that outwardlie it sheweth like Punta de Gualla but the markes and right tokens thereof are that it hath a thyn point of land striking out in forme lyke a tongue with a stone riffe hanging from it towards the sea as farre as you may throw a stone this point of land or tongue striking out is full of Indian Palme trees which shew verie faire and a myle or two before you come at it this poynt or tongue of land appeareth beyond the Palme trees further into the sea but the Palme trees are thicke and shew verie faire and before you come to Tanadare you haue two or three sandie bayes not necessarie to be described and whē you come right against the wood or bushe of Palme trees in the middle thereof you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indians Idoles from this Pagode towardes the North syde you shall see certaine downes of white and redde earth which are good markes and the right knowledge of that Countrey you must not goe too close vnto the shore for it hath a small sand stretching into the sea but not farre when you see the downes aforesayd then you must runne at eyghtéene twentie fadome déepe for that if the wind beginneth to calme and your ground to
be deeper you must cast anker for if you neglect it you should presentlie fall on ground because the streames and waters doe runne verie strong to sea ward from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek and from the south syde thereof there appeareth certaine great houels of redde earth that lie within the Créeke and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land From Belleguao to Gualla are fyue myles and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde ful of Palme trees and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land all of stonie cliffes and when you make towardes Gualla you shall perceaue a high land full of woods and a playne desert and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees and if you haue occasion to anker in the bay you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla which are twelue myles you runne from the one to the other Northwest and Southeast and somewhat Northwest by West and Southeast and by east and all the way along this Coast to Gualla is not to be sayled but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead From Gualla to the point called Belitote is fyue or sixe miles which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees and right ouer against it about half a mile there is a great Cliffe and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes along the shore by the point of Gualla are two sandes whereon the water breaketh the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea about ¼ of a myle and the other is right ouer against the bay on the North syde running a small myle into the sea and of this you must take great care you may well passe by it in the night at twentie fadome deepe so that you need not feare vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long speciallie when it is high water From thence you shall take your course vnto Columbo as the Coast reacheth and from the Iland of Verberijn forward the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes and béeing hard by Columbo about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo you may anker at eight or nyne fadome but by Columbo you cannot doe it but if you haue great occasion then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land There you finde stonie ground and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe inwardes to the sea and that in most places therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker first prouing with a lead the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small and in other places great sand which is the surest and in some places it hath redde sand and lykewise places of white and blacke sand which are tokens of the ground along the Coast vppon all the which ground you may anker The right markes and tokens of Columbo which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort are these y t is when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam so called which is a high hill higher then any other in al the countrie about it shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels and begin to sayle by thinne flat land which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson are North Northeast Northeast and sometime East Northeast and also East the Viracoins which are the winds that blow out of the Sea are many times North and Northwest I write this that men should not wonder to find them so in that place likewise you finde there West Northwest and West Southwest windes according to the coniunctions of the times when men are in that coast the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west throughout all India at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night and come out of the Sea towards the land and therefore by the Portingales they are called Viracoins that is wind out of the Sea and from midnight to noone the winds blow out of the East which come ouer the land into the Sea as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos or land winds if they be not Northeast then you shall not set sayle before midnight if they be not full to Sea ward then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you to put to farre into the Sea for that you could not well get the land againe because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest doe often stay late blow but slowly From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn to the East side of the Cape towards the land called das Areas Gordas that is of the fat or thicke Dounes which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn on the side of Choramandel for it is good to put on there because of y e streame which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas as also some part of the way to the Cape you finde ground and many times sée the land because it is long at 40. fadome and lesse and if you come inward from the Cape being by night and find ground then you may fréely passe ouer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe for as you come right against the Cape then the ground is ful of white Sand and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward from Areas Gordas to the Cape for from Areas Gordas inwards the ground is ful of banks and small blacke Sand and you must runne a mile a mile and a halfe and two miles from the shore vpon the ground and depthes afore saide And when you passe by Cabo de Comorijn to Coulaon you shall holde your course along the coast about a mile from the shore that you may Anker and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon and being in the night time the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon is to
not runne betwéen them for that without them and close by you finde good ground I haue layne there at anker with a calme about a mile from the Iland which lieth néerest the land there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest From this Iland Pulo CoÌ„dor to y e IlaÌ„d Pulo Secir the course is Northeast and Southwest northeast and by east and Southwest by West 45 miles This Iland is low and long land reaching North and south and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland lying halfe a myle from the land you may passe betwéene it and the Iland on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye where once a Iunco that is to say an Indian or Chinish great ship was laid on the shore to bee new dressed belonging to a Rouer of Patane a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Malacca towardes the kingdome of Syon I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay it is all good ground this Iland is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor without seeing it vnder 8. degrees you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep with black muddy ground much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water and being 12. miles past it at the height of eight degrées and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées â— to this place you shall holde your course Northeast for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain thinking to get the coast of Champa when you come within two miles of the Ilandes lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir you shal find muddie thick water comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom three miles distant from each other you runne along East Southeast and West Northwest the East Ilande is high and round on the sea side being calme in the vpper part therof it hath the fashioÌ„ of a Cap such as y e Mandorijus which are the Lords of China doe weare halfe a mile from it lyeth a Cliffe like an Ilande and hath on the West side reddish cliffes and on the north side an other Iland round about all these Ilandes and cliffes there is no grounde I set this down for that I haue sailed all this countrie and noted the way as also all whatsoeuer I haue declared in this discourse we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly to discouer Pulo Secir and from thence to the coast of Champa for you must know that the streames from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes runne Eastward by which meanes you runne presently to the coast as hereafter I will shew and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde thâ—n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa which wil driue you ouerthwart from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir there are no sands nor shallows as many men suppose the worst you find is that there is no ground these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa and if you passe by it on the south side then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast till you be in sight of the coast and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe and if you passe by it on the North side you must runne Northeast and Northeast and by North and not higher to loofewarde to shun the drougthes whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away and if in the night time you passe by any land then cast out your lead and finding fifteene fadome water then put no neerer to the land but presently runne East Northeast as the coast lyeth for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast 4. mile from it The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes you run along by them East north east and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and â— and before you come within two or three miles thereof the sandie strand and high way endeth for this point is a verie high land reaching Southwarde in so that it maketh a Cape from thence forward it is altogether verie high land to Varella with great hils within this point towards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke and two miles on this side before you come at it There lyeth close by the land a smal long and low Iland all of harde stony cliffes and rockes which a farre off shew like a towne from this Iland to Pulo Secir there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid there is a riuer called Sidraon where you may enter with shippes of 6â—â— Barhes on this riuer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa it hath for a marke a long houell w t 2. tops I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid and found 8. fadome deep altogether euen stonie ground with much of the hearbe Sargaslo whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe When you are by the coast of Champa then you shal runne East Northeast within two or thrée miles at the furthest it is altogether faire and good anker ground to the point or hooke aforesaid you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side not passing betweene it and the land from this point to another point are 12. miles you runne Northeast and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes the first wherof is the hauen where you lade blacke woode which is called Deâ—raon from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North and seuen miles before you come to y e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town and two miles further there is an Iland of stonie cliffes close to the land which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador or the fisher and if you desire to runne to
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
the greater it séemeth This Island is very high in the middle and descendeth downeward towards the end The Northeast point is lower then the southeast so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out which is very lowe From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes The depth in that place is fiue and twenty fadome muddy ground Wednesday being the seuentéenth we had a North Northeast wind and then it came North-east and began to blowe so stiffe that we were forced to strike all our sailes letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile with all our cords wel bound made fast and the storm or Tuffon was so great that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord els it was presently stricken in péeces This Tempest began first North Northeast and so ranne about till it was North Northwest At the departure whereof it was so boysterous that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes This was vpon Thursday being the two and twentith day of the new Moone the next night following the wind came west but because as then the Sea ranne verie high we let not our sailes fall but in the morning we had the wind southwest and then we let fall our sailes minding to follow on our course with great ioy throughout our ship thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson but towards night it was calme againe and then wee had a North wind holding our course eastward but not long after it was altogither calme notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast wherewith we hoised sailes running northeast and Northeast and by North and when it began to be day we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos that is the thrée kings lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔ being the one and twenty day of the Moone The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa which is a very high Land and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side being a faire russet colour with two other greater Rainebowes whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois that is Cats eyes which are small clouds which at the first shewe seeme no greater then a mans fist about the Cape De bona Speranza which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes as in the voyage from India to Portingale is alreadie partly declared wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof the better to looke vnto it and to watch for them to y e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place But returning vnto our matter I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries as long as the winde commeth out of the North and so Southwest you are to make no account thereof for it will presently bée North Northeast and East but when it is calme then you shall haue a Southeast winde and then South and Southwest which are the monson and windes of that time but if it beginne againe to be calme it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast but it will presently be southeast againe with faire weather which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly Anno 1585. Monday the two and twentie day wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. degrées and 1 ◠hauing a Southeast Southsoutheast winde with good weather and helde our course Northeast and as I gessed wée had runne after wée had faire weather and wind about two and twentie miles béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout the blacke birdes by the Portingales being called Alcatrases The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday wée had verie good weather in such manner that at that mealetide wée sailed about fiftéene miles béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China In the morning we cast out the Lead and found one and fiftie fadome with white and blacke sand Wednesday being the four and twentie day wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées with an East Southeast and Southeast winde and good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North and sometimes but not much Northeast and by East I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North and so to haue sailed 16. miles being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles lying Northeast from vs and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe sandie muddy ground Thursday the 25. of Iuly wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind winding Southward and so helde till the 26. day and draue Westward finding two fadome lesse in our depth The 26. we wound Northward without sailes yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall but wholly against my mind but onely at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilat saying that the same day wee should haue the winde larger which was not so but cleane contrarie so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. degrées to stay for Southeast windes and then to runne North Northeast Northeast and Northeast and by North because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées hauing a South Southeast winde then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma for so it happened vnto vs because the wind was so strong that we could beare but our foresaile and halfe the maine top-saile as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow and put our shippe out of course and that the streames ranne Southeast This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma But as soone as the winde came full whereby wee ranne East East and by North and East Northeast at 40. and 34. fadome water the ground being verie smal sand holding as much Eastward as possibly we might and sometimes east and by South wherby we
the Sunne and when the Sunne in the rising or setting is red and of a dead couler and so darke that you may sée it round about not casting forth any beames it signifieth calme weather The like doth the Moone In the time of the monson when the Northeast winds doe commonly blowe and that the clouds at the Sun-setting bée red then it signifieth North winds when in diuers places of the sea you sée skumme driuing vpon the water as white as Cotton being about a finger long then it signifieth tempests and foule weather This skum procéedeth of the small waues that breake wherof there are many in y e place In the moneth of Iuly there bloweth other winds in those places then the monson running from one place to the other till in the end they be northeast then it is certain it will be tempest foule weather If from the Island of Lamao to the Cape of Sumbor in the manson of the South and Southwest winds you find an East winde with great heate and same great droppes of water it signifieth foule weather The 48. Chapter In what dayes and moneths you find tempests and foule weather in the coast of China FRom the seuenth to the eleuenth of Iune often and commonly vpon the coast of China there are great tēpests From the beginning of Iuly to the 26. of the same moneth you are neuer frée nor out of danger of tempests and foule weather for that all that time you haue foule stormie weather the wind neuer staying in one place but running round about the compasse From the 12. of August forward in the whole Moone of September to the end of October all that time there is continually foule weather The 49. Chapter Of the times of faire weather vpon the coast of China THe whole moneth of Iune except it be from the seuenth to the eleuenth day there is very litle soule weather for that vnlesse it be vpon the daies aforesaid you haue the windes of the monson with faire and cléere weather without stormes to saile from the Island Pulo Cantao to the Islandes Cantao and Macau without stormes you must set saile on the 26. of Iuly and saile till the 12. of August and all that time you are without tempests In the middle way from the Island of Iapon to the coast and land of Liampo you haue alwaies West windes which blowe in Iapon in the moneths of Nouember and December The 50. Chapter A briefe description of the course from Macau in China to Noua Spaigna with the scituations of the countries PVtting out of the East channell of the Hauen of Macau then you must hold inward to sea as much as you may and hauing a contrarie winde runne as long as the wind giues you leaue to kéep that course but if the winde be scant whereby you may not holde your course Northeast or Northeast and by North then turne on the other side as long as the wind serueth that you may run Southeast for the space of thrée or foure daies for it is better to kéepe Southeast then to run Northward This course you shall holde as the winde serueth you vntill you think you are 300. miles from the land and being there you must run 200. or more miles beyond Iapon and although you holde your course North yet you néed not feare any thing kéeping good account of the wracking or winding of your compasse towardes the West for it might hinder you much running as often as you can Southeast or to Loofeward as also not leauing y e course of Northeast as often as you can vntill you be vnder the height In the gulfe you shal sée certaine great blacke birds which is a signe that you are farre to Seaward and if you sée them about euening that they stretch their legs out along by their tailes then looke to your selfe for it signifieth foule weather When you come within 200. miles or more of the other land then you shall loose the sight of those birdes and if the wind and weather driue you vnder many heights and that you sée many heapes of wéeds driuing vpon the water which are commonly séene when you are 100. and 120. myles inwarde to sea then you must runne on the outside of Iapon Southeastward till you be vnder 31. and 32. degrées and as then knowing the land which will lie hard by whē you see it first you must runne without it and beware you run not vpon the Island called Ilha de Sedros that is the Island of Cedar trées and make no account by the course of the Sea or compasse for the Island of Cedars lyeth by the Cape of S. Lucas béeing verie false in the course because the land if it lay by it doth come more and likelier out then it doth towardes the South The Cape of Saint Lucas is a high land and sheweth when you are hard by it as if it had stonie cliffes sticking out of it the end thereof béeing verie blacke shining and darke the Land thereof presently running inwards towards the North and if you néed fresh water within the cliffes of the said Cape of S. Lucas there is a great sandie strande where you haue a verie good Rode to anker where close by the sea you find great store of fresh water From thence you shall crosse ouer to the other side vpon the Southeast bough without the Marias which is a better course then inward all the coast is faire and good so that you may well runne along by it vntill you come to certaine cliffes lying by the Hauen called El Puerto de la Natiuidad where within the créeke you presently finde the Hauen of Saint Iago de Colima the marks wherof are those On the East side it hath a round houell that descendeth downward if you be forced to put into it you must vnderstand that it hath a great mouth or entrie aboue two or thrée miles wide wherin you haue no cause to feare any thing but that you sée before your eies you must runne into it till you be cleane within the point where you haue a riuer of fresh water that runneth into the Sea where you shall find Spanish Fishermen if you desire to saile further you must frō thence to the hauen of Acapulco run for the space of 80. miles along by the shore for it is verie faire and cleare till you be at the end of the high land that is to the Hauen called El Puerto del Marques which a farre off sheweth like an Island but when you goe so néere it that you may well discerne it to be firme land then on the vpper part thereof you shall sée some white stones which shewe like white Runderen that goe in the way you may fréely runne towardes it till you begin to sée the mouth therof and then put into it This in briefe in my opinion is the best course that you may bold in this voiage which I would likewise haue holden if I
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found
visited by many Turkes and Arabians This entery is also called the redde sea not that the water is redde but onely because there are certain redde hilles lying about the same that yéeld redde marble stones and because the sand in some places is redde it is the same sea which Moyses with the children of Israel passed through on dry land From the hooke or cape de Guardafum which lesseneth and is narrow inwardes towardes Sues in time past called Arsinoe which is the vttermost town where the narrownesse or straight endeth are 360. miles and from thence ouer land to the Mediterranean sea in Italie are 90. myles the straight or narrownes is in the entraÌ„ce also within the broadest place 40. miles and in some places narrower it hath also diuers Islands and on the one side inwarde by Sues Northward Arabia deserta on the other side south ward Aegipt where the riuer Nilus hath her course and somewhat lower towardes the Indian seas Arabia Felix and on the other side right against it the countrey of Abexynes or Prester Iohns land vpon the hooke or corner of Arabia Felix the Portingals in time past helde a fort called Aden but nowe they haue none whereby at this present the Turks come out of the straight or mouth of the redde sea with Gallies that are made in Sues and doe much hurt and iniurie vppon the coast of Abex or Melinde as when time serueth we shall declare Hauing againe passed the line we had the sight of the North Star whereof vpon the coast of Guinea from the Island of S. Thomas vntill this tyme wee had lost the fight The 4. of September wee espyed a shippe of our owne fléete and spake with him it was the S. Francisco which sayled with vs till the 7. day and then left vs. The 13. of September wee saw an other shippe which was the S. Iacob which sailed out of sight again and spake not to vs. The 20. of September we perceiued many Snakes swimming in the sea being as great as Eeles and other thinges like the scales of fish which the Portingals call Vintijns which are halfe Ryalles of siluer Portingall money because they are like vnto it these swimme and driue vpon the sea in great quantities which is a certain sign token of the Indian coast Not long after with great ioy we descried land and found ground at 47. fâ—dome déepe being the land of Bardes which is the vttermost ende and corner of the enterie of the Riuer Goa of being about thrée miles from the Citie it is a high land where the shippes of India do anker and vnlade and from thence by boates their wares are carryed to the towne That day we ankered without in the sea about thrée miles from the land because it was calme and the fludde was past yet it is not without danger and hath round about a faire and fast land to anker in for as then it beganne in those places to be summer The 21. being y e next day there came vnto vs diuers boats called Almadias which borded vs bringing w t theÌ„ all maner of fresh victuailes from the land as fresh bread fruit some of them were Indians that are christened there came likewise a Galley to fetch the Archbishoppe and brought him to a place called Pangijn which is in the middle way betwéene Goa and the roade of Bardes and lyeth vpon the same Riuer Here hee was welcommed and visited by the Vice Roy of India named Don Francisco Mascarenias and by all the Lordes and Gentlemen of the countrey as well spirituall as temporall The Magistrates of the towne desired him to stay there ten or twelue dayes while preparation might bee made to receiue him with triumph into the cittie as their manner is which hee granted them The same day in the afternoone we entred the Riuer into the roade vnder the lande of Bardes being the 21. of September Anno 1583. being fiue monthes and 13. dayes after our putting forth of the Riuer of Lisbone hauing stayed 15. daies at Mosambique which was one of the spéediest and shortest voyages that in many yeares before and since that time was euer performed There we founde the shippe named Saint Laurence which arriued there a day before vs The 22. day the S. Iacob came thither and the next day after arriued the S. Francis There dyed in our shippe 30. persons among the which some of them were slaues and one high Dutchman that had beene one of the King of Spaines garde euery man had beene sicke once or twice and let bloode This is commonly the number of men that ordinarily dyed in the ships sometimes more sometimes lesse About ten or twelue years since it chaunced that a Vice Roy for the King named Ruy Lorenso Detauora sayled for India that had in his shippe 1100. men and there happened a sicknes among them so that there dyed thereof to the number of 900. and all throwne ouer borde into the sea before they came to Mosambique the Vice Roy himselfe being one Which was an extraordinarie sicknesse and it is to be thought that the great number of men in the ship were the cause of bréeding the same therefore in these dayes the shippes take no more so many men into them for that with the number they carrie they haue stinking ayre and filth enough to clense within the shippe The 30. of September the Archbishoppe my maister with great triumph was brought into the towne of Goa and by the Gentlemen and Rulers of the countrey led vnto the cathedrall Church singing Te Deum laudamus and after many ceremonies and auncient customes they conuayed him to his pallace which is close by the Church The 20. of Nouember our Admirall S. Phillip arriued at Cochin without staying to land in any place hauing indured much miserie by the meanes before rehearsed hauing béene seuen monthes and twelue daies vnder saile The last of the same month of Nouember the shippes sayled from Goa to the coast of Malabar and Cochin there to receiue their lading of Pepper and other spices some take in their lading on the coast of Malabar as at Onor Mangator Cananor c. and some at Cochin which can alwayes lade two shippes with Pepper Cochin lyeth from Goa Southwarde about 90. miles The shippes vnlade all their Portingall commodities in Goa where the Marchantes and Factors are resident and from thence the ships do sayle along the coast to take in their lading in Pepper and to Cochin as it is said before Each shippe doeth commonly lade eyght thousande Quintales of Pepper little more or lesse Portingall waight euery Quintale is 128. pound Then they come to Cochin whither the Factors also do trauell and lade in them Cloues Sinamon and other Indian wares as in my voyage homewarde I will particularly declare together with the manner of the same In the monthes of Ianuary and Februarie Anno 1584. the shippes with their lading returned from Cochin some before
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
hath likewise a market euery day where all kind of thinges are to be bought as in Cananor but in greater quantities The land of Cochin is an Island and it is in many places compassed about and through the Isle with small Riuers Right ouer against Cochin Northwarde lyeth an other Island called Vaypiin which is likewise compassed about with water like the fortresse of Cranganor all these landes and Countries are low and flat land like the Countrie of Holland but haue no ditches nor downes but onely the flat shore vpon the Sea side and within the shore the Strand of the ryuer nor without any high ground or shelters and so it still continueth The Countrie is verye great and pleasant to behold full of woodes and trees it hath also woods of Cinamon trées which are called Canella de Maâ—es that is wilde CinamoÌ„ which is not so good as the Cinamon of Seyloâ— for when the Cinamon of Seyloâ— is worth 1â—0 Pardaâ—eÌ„ or Dollers that Cinamon is worth but 5 or 3â— Pardaâ—wen and is likewise forbidden â—o bee carried into Portingale notwithstanding There is euery yeare great quantitie thereof shipped but it is entred in the Custome bookes for Cinamon of Seylon whereby they pay the King his full Custome for the best Cochin hath also much Pepper and can euery yeare lade two ships full other shippes lade along the coast at the fortresse aforesaid vse to come vnto Cochin after they haue discharged all their Portingal wares and Marchandises at Goa and thether also come the Factors and Marchants and lade their wares as in my Voyage homewards I will declare Without Cochin among the Malabares there dwelleth also diuers Moores that belieue in Mahomet and many Iewes that are very rich and there liue fréely without being hindred or impeached for their religion as also the Mahometans with their churches which they cal Mesquiten the Bramanes likewise which are the Spiritualitie of the Malabares Indians haue their Idols and houses of Diuels which they call Pagodes These thrée nations doe seuerally holde maintaine their lawes and ceremonies by them selues and liue friendly and quietly together kéeping good pollicie and iustice each nation béeing of the Kinges counsell with his Naires which are his gentilmen and nobilitie so that when any occasion of importaunce is offered then al those thrée nations assemble themselues together wherein the King putteth his trust of the which King and his Naires Malabare and Baâ—amenes c. with their maners customes aparrell Idols pagodes and ceremonies in an other place I will shewe you more at large together with their pictures couÌ„terfetes and for this time I cease to speake thereof wil procéede in the description of the coasts which I haue already beguÌ„ From Cochin to Coulon are 12. myles and lyeth vnder 9 degrées it is also a fortresse of the Portingals where likewise euery yere they lade a ship with pepper from Couâ—on to the cape de Comori are 20. myles this corner lieth full vnder 7. degrées a half which is the end of the coast of Malabar of India The 12. Chapter The description of the kings the diuision of the land and coast of Malabar and their originall TO vnderstand the gouernment and diuisions of the laÌ„d of Malabar you must know that in tymes past but long sithence the whole land of Mâ—labar was ruled by one King being then but one kingdome where now are manie and as the Malabares saye the last king that ruled the whole couÌ„try alone was named Sarama Perimal in whose time the Arabian Mahometanes much frequented the couÌ„trie of Malabar because of the great trafique of Spices which as then were sent from thence to the red sea and so conueyed into all places of the world Those Arabians by their subtilties delt in such manner with the King that they perswaded him and many of his couÌ„try to beleue in the lawe of Mahomet as they did almost throughout whole India and other orientall couÌ„tries and Ilands which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hardly be brought to beleue in Christ but rather seeke by all meanes to ouerthrowe the Christians and to fight against the Portingales in those countries as in the Portingal Chronicles and Histories of the first discouery and conquest of the Indies is at large described But returning to our matter this King Sarama was so déepely rooted in his new sect of Mahometes law that he determined in him selfe to leaue his kingdome and goe on pilgrimage to Mecca to see Mahomets graue and there to ende his lyfe in so holy an exercise thinking thereby to be saued which in the end he brought to effect And because he had neither childreÌ„ nor heyres to possesse his kingdome he deuided the same among his chiefest best seruaÌ„ts frieÌ„ds giuing to one Cochin to an other Cananor to the third Chale to the fourth Coulon c. and so he delt with all the other places of his dominions making euery one of those places a kingdome The town of Calicut he gaue to one of his best beloued seruaÌ„ts together with the title of Samoriin which is as much to say as Emperour and chief of al the rest and commanded that they should all acknowledge him as their Soueraigne and they his vassalles and at his commandement whereby euen vntill this time the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin with the commandement and authoritie ouer the other kings throughout the whole countrie of Malabar by such means as you haue heard before which done the king weÌ„t on pilgrimage to Mecca wher he ended his dayes and the Samoriin with the other kings continued each man in his newe kingdome whose successors vntill this day doe continue and gouerne the said kingdomes onely the Samoriin is somewhat imbased and the king of Cochin exalted since the Portingals ariued in the Indies as it is said before These Malabares are excellent good soldiours and goe naked both men and women onely their priuy members couered and are the principallest enemies that the Portingals haue and which doe them most hurt and although commonlie they haue peace with the Samoriin and hold so many forts vpon the land as you haue heard before yet the Malabares haue their hauens as Chale Calicut Cunhale Panane and others from whence with boates they mak roads into the sea and doe great mischief making many a poore merchant The Samoriin likewise when the toy taketh him in the head breaketh the peace that by the counsell of the Mahometanes who in all things are enemies to the Christians séeke to do them mischief and because of the Malabares inuasions the Portingall fléet is forced euery yeare to put forth of Goa in the summer-time to kéepe the coast and to preserue the merchants that trauaill those couÌ„tries from y e Malabars for that the most traffique in India is in Foists like galleyes wherein they traffique from the one place to the other which is
the Portingals and other countreymen can better brooke it then other places in India From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca and also to India there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan Saint Thomas and Musulepatan of all colours and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures verie fine and cunningly wrought which is much worne in India and better estéemed then silke for that it is higher prised then silke because of the finenes cuÌ„ning workmaÌ„ship they are called Rechatas Cheylas wherof the Christians Portingals in India do commoÌ„ly make bréeches They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their nauelles downeward bound about their bodies which they weare within the house very finely made the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer and such like stuffe of a thousand sortes very beautifull to behold wherewith they cloath themselues in very comely manner In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins wherein they carry the women as in the Indian figures you shall sée which are so thicke that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes very faire to looke vpon and very high being of diuers colours as blacke redde c. Whereof in an other place I will say more The 16. Chapter Of the Kingdome of Bengalen and the riuer Ganges AT the ende of the Kingdome of Orixa and the â—ast of â—horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world and it is not knowne from whence it springeth Some are of opinion that it commeth out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers which is that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know froÌ„ whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish and such like foode thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire which people hauing made boats fitte for the purpose he sent vp the riuer who were certain monthes vpon the water so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie with still and pleasant water that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not so that they were compelled séeing no remedie to returne againe the same way that they came and being returned certified the King what they had séene They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt the mouth or entry thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées and the coast runneth East and by South to the Kingdome of Aracan which is about 80. miles it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes sholes hookes and créekes for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf which is called Bengala for that froÌ„ Aracan the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water and they do certainely belieue that such as wash and bath themselues therein bee they neuer so great sinners all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne as if they were newe borne againe and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same from all the partes of India the East countries in great troupes where they vse diuers strange ceremonies and superstitions most horrible to heare for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life From thâ— Riuer Eastward 50. miles lyeth the towne of Chatigan which is the chief towne of Bengala The naturall borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon but somewhat whiter then y e Chingalas they are a most subtill and wicked people and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India for that they are all théeues and the women whores although this fault is common throughout all India no place excepted They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot but haue euery time a new pot Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie they haue their noses cut off and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company which is most narrowly looked vnto by their law The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries for they do yearly lade diuers shippes therewith which come thether from all places and there is neuer any want thereof and all other things in like sort and so good cheape that it were incredible to declare for that an Oâ—e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lariâ—n which is as much as halfe a Gilderne Shéepe Hens and other things after the like rate a Candit of Ryce which is as much little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure is sold there for halfe a Gilderne and for halfe a Doller Sugar and other ware accordingly whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue The Portingalles deale traffique thether and some places are inhabited by them as the hauens which they call Porto grande and Porto pequeno that is the great hauen and the little hauen but there they haue no Fortes nor any gouernement nor policie as in India they haue but liue in a manner like wild men and vntamed horses for that euery man doth there what hee will and euery man is Lord and maister neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice whether there be any or none and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them some here some there scattered abroade and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them committed notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and marchants which all y e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts Besides their Ryce much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine and much estéemed in India and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts but also into Portingal and other places this linnen is of diuers sorts and is called Sarampuras Cassas Comsas Beatillias Satopassas and a thousande such like names They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe which
and Salsette are by the Kings of Portingale let out to farme and the rents therof are imployed to the payment of the Archbishop Cloysters Priests Viceroy other the Kings Officers yearely stipends which is graunted them by speciall Priueledges and Patents from the King The Iland is verie hillie and in some places so desert and rough that on some sides men can hardly trauell ouer land but with great labour to the towne of Goa the Iland euen to the Sea side is full of Villages and inhabited by the Canarijus which are the naturall borne people of the land and doe altogether liue by working vpon the land and by their Palme trees The villages and dwellings of these Canarijus are most rounde about the Iland and on the water sides or by small Lakes whereof there are some fewe within the Iland and the cause why they dwell thus is for that the Palme trées will not grow in any other place but vpon low ground by the waters specially in sandie ground so that there are no Palme trées to be found on the high land within the countrie vnlesse it bee vpon sandie groundes on the Sea coast or ryuers sides On the East side of the towne of Goa vpwardes into the ryuer about thrée miles from the towne of Bardes lyeth a place wher the Portingals ships doe Anker the ryuer hath some créekes and a ship of 200. Tunnes or there abouts may easily discharge before the Towne but the Portingales great ships must discharge them selues at Bardes which being done they may i◠they will fréely goe and lie before the town The towne is well builte with faire houses and stréetes after the Portingall manner but because of the heate they are somewhat lower They commonly haue their Gardens and Orchards at the backe side of their houses full of all kinde of Indian fruites as also the whole Iland through they haue many pleasant Gardens and farmes with houses to play in and trées of Indian fruites whether they goe to sport themselues and wherein the Indian women take great delight The towne hath in it all sortes of Cloysters and Churches as Lisbone hath onely it wanteth Nunnes for the men cannot get the women to trauell so farre where they should be shut vp and forsake Venus with whome so that they may enioy and fulfill their lustes they had rather loose their liues whereof they make small account The Iland is both winter and Summer all alike gréene and hath alwaies some kinde of fruite in season which is a great pleasure the towne lyeth vppon some hils and dales like Lisbone it hath in times past béene verie small and walled with a drie Ditch round about it wherein there is no water but when it rayneth the walles are yet standing but no Gates remaining and the towne is now built round about with houses so that it is at the least twice as big without the walles as it is within and lyeth open without walles or closures sauing onely that the Iland hath a wal on the East side which beginneth ouer against the land of Salsette and so runneth along vntill you come at Bardes and is onely to defend them from the firme land where the Portingales haue no commaundement The whole Iland hath no other defence but onely vpon the corner of the land of Bardes at the mouth of the ryuer where there standeth an olde ruinous Castle wherein lyeth two or thrée Iron péeces and one man that in the night time kéepeth the watch the Iland on the Sea side is verie high full of stonie Cliffes but the land of Bardes hath on the Sea side a verie faire white Sand about halfe a mile long and somewhat more the defence of the Ilande consisteth herein that on the East side there are thrée or foure passages or Gates that stand vpon the water side on the vttermost part of the Iland right against the firme land Salsette and Bardes euerie gate or passage hath a Captaine and a clarke which kéepe watch that no man may passe into the other side but by their licence And the Indians Decanijus and other Moores and heathens that are resident in Goa and therein haue their habitation when they goe into the firme land to fetch their necessarie prouisions comming to those places which are called Passos they must euerye man haue a marke which is Printed on their naked armes and so they passe ouer to the other side and at their returne againe they must shew the same marke whereby they may fréely enter for the which they pay two Basarukes which is as much as a Hollanders Doit and this is the profit that the Captain and Clarke of the said Passos doe make In the night they haue a Boy that kéepeth watch and hath a small Bell which hangeth ouer the gate which Boylyeth downe and tieth the string of the Bell at his foote and so ringeth it often times to shew that hee watcheth which is all the watch they hold thoroughout the whole Iland There are fiue of these Passos one vpon the South side of the Iland where men passe to the firme lande and to the land of Salsette and is called Benesterijn commonly named Passo de Saint Iago because the Parish of Saint Iacobs standeth ther The Tebe de Passo is on the East side of the Iland where men doe onely passe into The firme land called O Passo Secco which is the drie passage for in that place the ryuer is at the narrowest and shallowest The third Passo on the South side of the Iland ioyneth almost to the Towne called O Passo de Daugijn or of Madre de Deus and so farre goeth the wall beginning at Passo de Benesterijn or S. Iago and from thence the whole Iland is without any wall or closure from this Passo right ouer against it they passe ouer to an Iland which is hard by the firme land where is also a Passo called O Passo de Norwa the fift or last Passo lyeth in the middle way of the Riuer downwards towards Bardes which is the strongest of them all and best looked vnto but no otherwise made then all the rest is called O Passo de Pangijn frō thence they passe to Bardes and also all the boates and ships that passe in and out of the riuer must stay there be searched and this is all their watch and strentgh in the Iland Touching the Portingales iustice and ordinances as well in worldly as spirituall causes they are al one as they are in Portingale They dwell in the towne among all sorts of nations as Indians Heathens Moores Iewes Armenians Gusarates Benianes Bramenes and of all Indian nations and people which doe all dwell and traficke therein euerie man holding his owne religion without constrayning any man to doe against his conscience onely touching their ceremonies of burning the dead and the liuing of marrying other superstitious deuelish inuentions they are forbidden by the Archbishop to vse them openly or in the
two men on foote the one with a great siluer or guilt vessell full of bread baked like cracklinges which in Portingall are called Rosquilhos and in the middle a great Ware candle well made and gilded thrust through with some peeces of money of golde and siluer for an offering to the Priest that baptiseth the childe and all ouer strowed and couered with Roses the other carryeth a great siluer or gilt saltseller in one of his handes and a lampe of the same stuffe in his other hande each with rich and costly Towels on their sholders after that followeth two Pallamkins on the one side y e Commere on the other side the Midwife with the child couered with a costly mantle made for the purpose and so the ceremonies of baptisme being ended in the Church it is againe in the like sort brought home and beeing there they haue the like manner of musicke and shalmes running and leaping with their horses before the window where the Commere sitteth with the same ceremonies as at the wedding This is the manner and custome of those that are married and keepe house But concerning the souldier that is vnmaried thus it is They goe in the summer time into the Armado lying on the water and being within the townes and on the land they are very stately apparrelled and goe verie grauely along the streets with their slaues or men hired for the purpose that beare a hatte ouer them for the sunne and raine for there are many IndiaÌ„s that are daily hired for the purpose and haue 12. Basarucos the day which is as much as two sâ—iuers or a stoter they serue such as haue no slaues and that will not keepe any to that end The souldiers dwell at least ten or twelue in a house where they haue among them a slaue or hiâ—ed Indian or two which serueth them and washeth their shirts and haue foure or fiue stooles with a table and euery man a Bedde Their meate is Rice sodden in water with some salt fish or some other thing of small value without breade and cleare fountaine water for their drinke wherewith they are well pleased They haue amongst them all one or two good sutes of apparell all of silke as the manner is there and when one goeth abroad the other stay at home for in the house they haue no néede of clothes but sit whosoeuer they bee in their shirts a paire of linnen bréeches and so as it were naked by reason of the great heate for if some of them haue occasion to goe out twenty times in one day they must so often lend him their apparel and hee must likewise put off his clothes as often as he commeth home againe Some souldiers haue a Gentleman or Captaine to their friendes which lendeth them monie to apparell themselues withall to the end when summer time commeth they may be ready to goe with them in Fléet to sea as also to haue their friendship by night and at other times to beare them company or to helpe them to bee reuenged of any iniury by them receiued as I said before for that he which in India hath most souldiers to his friends is most regarded and feared So that to bee short in this manner they doe maintaine themselues in common whereby they are able to come in presence of the best of the countrie Manie and most of them haue their chiefe maintenance from the Portingales and Mesticos wiues as also the Indian Christians wiues which doe alwaies bestow liberall rewardes and giftes vppon them to satisfie and fulfill their vnchaste and filthie desires which they know very well how to accomplish and secretly bring to passe There are some likewise that get their liuings by their friends trauelling for them from place to place with some wares and marchandises and they are called Chattims These doe giue ouer and leaue the office of a souldier in the Fléete and the Kinges seruice for as it is said there is no man compelled thereunto although their names be registred in the office yet doe they still keepe the name of souldier as long as they trauaile abroad and are not married The souldiers in these dayes giue themselues more to be Chattims and to deale in Marchandise then to serue the King in his Armado because the Captaines and Gentlemen begin to be â—lacke in doing good vnto them as in times past they vsed to doe Also they giue themselues to rest and pleasure wherefore if they can deuise any meanes for it they had rather trauaile deale in trade of Marchandise and to marie and be quiet in respect that the common souldiers in these dayes are but slackely paide for that when they haue at the least ten or twenty certificates to shew for their former seruices then haue they not the meanes to furnish themselues with prouision to make a voyage into Portingale or to take any presents with them there to bestow them for without such meanes they are neyther heard nor yet regarded and if it fall out that they doe procure the reuersion of any offices it is so long before the time commeth that they doe enioy them beeing many in reuersion that oftentimes they die before they can obtaine them Againe the long trauaile and great voyage maketh many to stay in India and to employ their time to other trades as they can best prouide themselues By these meanes the wars in India are not so hot nor so throughly looked into neyther any other countries sought into or founde out as at first they vsed to doe Now they doe onely striue to get praise and commendation and to leaue a good report behinde them and now likewise they are all giuen to scraping catching as well the Viceroy Gouernours and others as also the Church men and spiritualtie little passing or esteeming the common profit or the seruice of the King but only their particular profits making their account that the time of their abode is but thrée yeares wherefore they say they will not doe otherwise then those that were before them did but say that others which come after theÌ„ shall take care for all for that the King say they gaue them their offices thereby to pay them for their seruices in times past and not for the profit of the common wealth therefore there is no more countries in India won or new found out but rather heere and there some places lost for they haue enough to doe to hold that they haue alreadie and to defende it from inuasion as also that they doe scoure the Sea coastes and yet many Marchants haue great losses euery yeare by meanes of the sea rouers and together with the euill gouernment of the Portingales and it is to be feared it will bee worser euery day then other as it is euidently séene This shall suffice for the manners and customes of the Indian Portingales and their warlike gouernments which is commonly by sea for by land they cannot trauaile by
it Xercast and Xerkest that is to say milke of trees for it is the dew y t falleth vpon the trées and remayneth hanging vpon the leaues like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises It is also gathered and kept in glasse Vials and so brought into India and other Countries for in India they vse it much in all sorts of purgations There is another sorte of Manna called Tiriamiabiin or Trumgibiin which they gather froÌ„ other leaues and hearbes that commeth in small peeces as big as Hempeséed and somewhat bigger which is red of a reddish colour Some thinke this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trées as Gumme doth it is much vsed in Ormus and Persia for purgations but not in India so much as the first sort there is yet another sorte which commeth in great peeces with the leaues among it it is like the Manna of Calabria this is brought out of Persia vnto Bassora and so to Ormus and from thence into India and is the dearest of all the rest There commeth also a Manna that is brought in leather bags or flasks which in Turkey and Persia they vse to ride withall is melted like Hony but of a white colour and in taste like the other sortes of Manna being altogether vsed for purgations and other medicines Manna very gently purgeth the gall it easeth and moystneth the harshnes of the throat the breastes and the stomacke it quencheth the thirst but because it purgeth but weakely it is strengthened with Tyme or Isop mingled with some strong purgations maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and power by meanes of the sweetnesse thereof which is apter and more plyable vnto nature But because it is no special marchandise I will speake no more thereof but for that wee are nowe in hande with medicines to purge I wil say some thing of the roote called Rhubaâ—be although there is no certaintie how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certaine y t it is not to be found in any couÌ„try but in China and in the farthest parts therof it is most brought by land through the Prouince of Vsbeke whereof I spake before which Prouince lyeth in Tartaria and bordereth on the one side vpon China and so reacheth behinde India vnto Persia Out of this Prouince it cometh vnto Ormus and from thence into India yet it is likewise brought by water but because it is not so good and doth sooner rot and spoyle by water then by land therefore most part of it is brought by land That which is most esteemed best sold and greatliest desired cometh in this manner that is first from China through Vsbeke and so through Turkie from whence it is caryed to Venice from thence into all these countries so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better because it cometh ouer land then that which is brought into Portingall because it cometh by water as also all thinges and herbes that belong to Physicke because they are better preserued by land then by water they are little brought by sea but it is a marchandise that is most caryed by land vnto Venice as also because the Portingales deale not much therein and are little giuen to curiosities conteÌ„ting themselues to deale with such wares as are commonlie knowne to all men without seeking further for they trouble not themselues with other things The 74. Chapter Of the wood called Sanders THere are 3. sorts of Sanders that is white yelow and red the white and the yealow which is the best come most out of the IlaÌ„d of Tymor which lyeth by Iaua This Iland hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders both of white and yealow and froÌ„ theÌ„ce it is caryed throughout all India and other couÌ„tries and trafficke much therewith the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Choramandel and Tanassariin which is in the countrie of Pegu the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and haue a certaine fruite vpon them like Cheries at the first green and after black but of no taste nor any thing worth for it presently falleth off onlie y e wood of y e trée is accounted of which is the SaÌ„ders It is called by the Inhabitants of the countrie where it groweth Chandanacon the Decannus Gusurates Canariins and other Indians cal it Sercandaa the Arabians and Persians Sandal wherevpon the Portingalles likewise doe call it Sandalo The yellow and white Sanders is much vsed and spent ouer all India by all the inhabitantes both Indians Moors Heathens and Iewes whatsoeuer they beate it or stampe it in water till it be as soft as pappe that done they besmere themselues therewith and let it drie vpon their bodies for it cooleth very much also because all the Indians doe much delight in sweet smelling sauours The white yellow or bleakish Sanders is likewise vsed by vs with Rose-water against the hotte paines in the head annointing it therewith all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow are good against hotte feauers being beaten and drunken into the body they help the hot stomacke as also laid vpon the stomacke with Rose water in burning feauers This Sanders is not onely good for the purposes aforesaid but also for strengthening the hart and therefore with great vse it is put into Cordiall medicines such as are made against the beating of the hart The red Sanders is little spent in India but they vse it onely against hot agues annointing their pulses therewith as also the temples their foreheads but it is much â—ryed into other countries as being very medicinable for many thinges and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idoles thereof because they should be the costlier The â—5 Chapter Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood SNakewood is most in the Island of Seylon it is a lowe Trée the roote thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white shewing somewhat yellowe very harde and bitter in taste it is much vsed in India they stampe and bruse it like Sanders in water or Wine and so drinke it it is very good well proued against all burning feauers one ounce thereof bruised and mixed with water is good against all poison and sicknes as the collick worms and all filthie humors and coldnes in the body and specially against the stinging of Snakes whereof it hath the name it was first found by means of a little beast called Qâ—il or Quirpele which is of bignesse very like a Ferret wherewith in those Countries they vse to driue Cunnies out of their holes and so ketch them whereof in India they haue many in their houses which they play withall to passe the time away as also to kill their Myce and Rattes and to driue them away This beast by nature is a great enemie to the Snake so that wheresoeuer she findeth any she fighteth with them and because it is often bitten by the Snake it knoweth how to heale it selfe with
leaue it after they had spent in making and keeping thereof at the least foure tunnes of Gold and reaped no profit thereof onely thinking thereby if the Samorijn should breake his word and come foorth as oftentimes hee had done that by meanes of that Hauen they would keep him in where he should haue no place to come abroad to doe them any more mischiefe But seeing that the Samorijn had many other hauens and places from whence they might put foorth to worke them mischiefe and as much as euer they did although the Samorijn protesteth not to know of it as also that he could not let it saying that they were Sea rouers and were neither subiect vnto him nor any man else They left their Fort and put no great trust in the Malabares as being one of the most rebellious and trayterous nations in all the Indies and make many a traueling Marchant poore by reason the Sea coast is made by them so dangerous and perilous to sayle by for the which cause the Portingales armie by Sea is yearely sent foorth out of Goa onely to cleare the coast of them yet are there many Malabares in diuers places which by rouing and stealing doe much mischiefe in the Countrie both by water and by land which kéepe themselues on the Sea side where they haue their creekes to come forth and to carie their prises in to hide them in the countrie They dwell in straw houses vpon stone hilles and rocks not inhabited so that to conclude they can not be ouercome neither doe they care for Samorijns nor any man else There is a Hauen belonging to these ryuers distant from Goa about twelue miles and is called Sanguisâ—o where many of those Rouers dwell and doe so much mischiefe that no man can passe by but they receiue some wrong by them so that there came dayly complaints vnto the Viceroye who as then was named Don Francisco Mascharenhas Earle of Villa Doâ—ta who to remedie the same sent vnto the Samorijn to will him to punish them who returned the messenger againe with answere that he had no power ouer them neither yet could commaund them as being subiect to no man and gaue the Viceroy free libertie to punish them at his pleasure promising that he should haue his aide therein Which the Viceroy vnderstanding prepared an armie of fifteen Foists ouer whom he made chiefe Captaine a Gentleman his nephew called Don Iulianes Mascharenhas giuing him expresse commandement first to goe vnto the Hauen of Sanguisen vtterly to raze the same downe to the ground which to effect this fléete being at Sea and comming to the said Hauen the Admirall of the fléete asked counsel what was best to be done because Sanguisen is an Iland lying within the coast the ryuer runing about it with many Cliffes shallowes in the entrance so that at a low water men can hardly enter in At the last they appointed that the Admirall with halfe the fléete should put in on the one side and the Vice Admirall called Ioan Barriga with the other halfe should enter on the other side which being concluded among them the Admiral entred first commaunding the rest to follow and rowed euen to the Firme land thinking they had come after but the other Captaines that were all young Gentlemen and vnexperienced began to quarell among themselues who should be first or last whereby the fléete was seperated some lay in one place some in an other vpon the droughts and shalowes and could not stirre so that they coulde not come to helpe the Admirall neither yet stirre backward nor forwards And when the Vice Admirall should haue put in on the other side the Captaines that were with him would not obay him saying he was no Gentleman and that they were his betters vppon these and such like pâ—ints most of the Portingals enterprises doe stand and are taken in hand whereby most commonly they receiue the ouerthrow and by the same meanes this fléete was likewise spoyled and could not helpe themselues which those of Sangueseâ— perceiuing hauing forsaken their houses and being on the toppes of the hilles and séeing that the Foistes lay without one seperated from the other vpon the Cliffes and shallowes not being able to put off and that the Admirall lay alone vppon the Strand and coulde not stirre they tooke courage and in great number set vppon the Admirals Foiste and put them all to the sword except such as saued themselues by swimming And although the Admirall might well haue saued himselfe for that a slaue profered to beare him on his back yet he would not saying that he had rather die honourably fighting against his enemie then to saue his life with dishonour so that he defended himselfe most valiantly But when they came so many vpon him that hee coulde no longer resist them they slew him being deâ—d cut off his head in presence of all y e other Foistes which done they stucke the head vpon a Pike crying in mocking vnto the other Portingales come and fetch your Captaine againe to their no litle shame and dishonour that in the meane time looked one vpon an other like Owles In the ende they departed from thence with the fléete euerie man seuerally by themselues like shéep without a shepheard and so returned againe into Goa with that great victorie The Captaines were presently committed to prison but each man excusing himselfe were all discharged againe great sorrowe being made for the Admirall specially by the Viceroy because hee was his brothers sonne and much lamented by euery man as being a man verie well beloued for his courteous and gentle behauiour the other Captaines to the contrarie being much blamed as they well deserued Presently therevpon they made ready an other armie with other Captaines whereof Don Ieronimo Mascharenhas was Admirall being cousin to the foresaid Admirall deceased to reuenge his death This fléete set foote on land and withall their power entred among the houses but the Sangueseans perceiuing them to come that purposely watched for them fled into the mountaines leauing their strawe houses emptie whether they could not be followed by reason of the wildnesse of the place whereupon the Portingales burnt their houses and cut down their trées rasing al things to the ground with the which distruction they departed thence no man resisting them At the same time the rulers of Cochijn by commandement of the Viceroy began to set vp a custome house in the towne which till that time had neuer beene there for the which cause the inhabitants rose vp would haue slaine them that went about it Whereupon they left it off till such time as the new Viceroy came out of Portingall called Don Duarede Meneses and with the old Viceroy assembled a counsell in Cochijn where the gouernment was deliuered vnto him and there he vsed such meanes that by faire words and intreatie they erected their custome house and got the townes mens good will but more by compulsion
his part in bribes for stowage of a ship sometimes seuen or 800 Dukats and the waiters asmuch and all this onlie by gifts Those offices are giuen by fauor of the Viceroy and the Veâ—dor de Falenda which is the cause that the ships are often times laden so ful that they are in manner ready to sinke so that a man would think it were impossible for them either to row or stirre because y e sailers officers of the ships haue nothing to doe therewith vntill the last hour that it setteth sayl theÌ„ it is deliuered into their handes and the waiters and porters goe their waies leauing the ship ful in euery place euen to the vppermost Oarlop where there standeth commonlie 7 or 8 chestes one aboue the other both in the sterne and foreshippe vpon the cables in the forecastell in the stirrige and in euery place which are all ful of great pots fattes chests hennes cages and such like so that it seemeth rather a Labyrinth or a Maze then a ship and so they commit themselues to the grace of God and set sayle and often times it falleth out that of 〈◊〉 saylers which are aboue the ship as it did in our ship not aboue 〈◊〉 of them could tell how to stéere or handle the Râ—ther besides that most of them were neuer at sea before but by fauor get their places as all the rest doe so that when occasion serueth being at sea they stand looking one vpon an other doing nothing but cry Misericordia and our Lady helpe vs. In Cochiin there are a great number of boaâ—es called Tones that are cut out of one peece of wood and yet some of them are so great that a man may lade 20 pipes of water in them These they carrie abord y e ships that lie at the least a mile within the sea and there they make price with them for a small summe of money and then they goe and fill the pipes themselues with pots which they haue for the purpose and it is a great commoditie vnto them This water is brought out of y e riuer of Cochin called Mangaâ—e 〈◊〉 is verie good Touching the towne and country of Cochin I haue already declared in the description of the Coast of Malabar so that this shall suffice to shew you what the countrie of India is and now I will shew vnto you the manner that is vsed in the ships when they sayle home againe which in part I haue alreadie touched as also our departure and voyage from India to Liâ—bon The 93. Chapter Of my voyage and departure from India to Portingale THe first of Ian. 1580 the Santa Maâ—ia set sayle and because it was one of the oldest shippes it was first dispatched away by reasoÌ„ that the sooner they depart from Cochin they come in better time to the Cape de Bona Speranza and the later they come thether the more storms foule wether they haue because as theÌ„ the Sunne goeth further into the North and leaueth the South parts Therefore commonly they let the best and stroÌ„gest shippes goe last because they are best able to hold out and in the Iland of S. Helena they stay one for the other vntill the 25. day of May no longer which is the time appointed by the king and so goe in company together vnto Portingale for from India vnto the Iland of S. Helena they need not keepe company because all that way they feare no Rouers and from thence they haue all their Cannon shot pulled in the better to passe the foule wether at the cape de bona Speranza The 6 of Ianuary the ship called our Ladie de Consepcao set sayle the 10 of the same the Admirall called S. Christopher the 12 the S. Anthony the 15 the S. Thomas which was the greatest and the best shippe in all the Fleet and richest of lading and the â—0 of the same Moneth wee set sayle in our ship called the Santa Crus being the last where in was about 20â— men of all sorts as â—aylers soldiers and slaues for from India there goe but few soldiers without the Viceroyes passeport by vertue whereof they goe to present their seruices and to fetch their payes and duties for the same And this they doe after they haue serued in India some yeares also when they haue abilitie to passe ouer for when they are poore and haue no helpe they must stay in Iâ—dia euen for necessities sake because they haue no means to procure their passage so that manie of them are constrayned to tarrie there and to marrie with â—ores and Indian women the better to maintain themselues although it be with miserie enough For the charges of a mans voiage out of Iâ—dia into Portinâ—al is at the lâ—ast â—â— or â—â—0 Pardawes and that onlie for meate and drinke which a poore soldier câ—n hardly compasse vnlesse he can procure some gentleman Captaine or some wealthy man in office to be â—auorable vnto him in helping him to performe his iourney For in the voyages homewards the king giueth nothing to the soldiers and passingers but free passâ—ge for him self and a chest of â— spannes high and broad and â— in length and that after they haue bene â— yeares in India for that Chest they pay neither fraught nor custome they likewise haue a Chest in the roomage free of fraight for which they pay custome and this they may sell in India to any Marchant as they commonlie doe and is worth vnto them at the least 40 or 5â— Pardawes These places they call liberties and hee that buyeth them registreth them in the name of him that he buyeth them of to the end that in Portingale they may enioy the same libertie and priuiledge all the saylers and Officers also of the shippes that sayl in them froÌ„ Portinâ—al haue likewise besides their places in the ships the forage of such a chest allowed them full of custome and fraight All these thinges are very sharply looked vnto for although the ships and goods are farmed yet when they ariue at Lisbon all the chests are brought into the Indian house and there visited to see if any goods be in them that is forbidden to be brought out of India as pepper Anill or Indigo and other such wares as are farmed of the king if any be found it is presently forfaited and all the wares that are in such chests are likewise valued so that if they amount vnto more then the value of 〈◊〉 Milreyes they must pay custome for the ouerplus which in the tyme of the kings of Portingale was not vsed for then they were accustomed to carrie their chestes home and to shew them only to the waiters and although the poore saylers and Officers doe much complâ—yne for the losse breaking of their liberties yet can they not be heard and thus there come but few Soldiers out of 〈◊〉 for the causes aforesayd for I certâ—nlie beleeue that of 15â—â— Soldiers and more y t
the officers are so pleased and vse no more delaies The eight of August the officers of the ships tooke counsell together with the Gouernour of the Island what they were best to doe thinking it not good to follow the kinges aduise considering their long staying and fearing some other hard fortune if they should stay and because a great Gallion being a maÌ„ of warre and very strong lay as then before the Island wherein was the Gouernour of Brasilâ—a who by foule weather had put in there they concluded that this Gallion being well appointed should sayle with them to Lisbone and although they did it without the aduise and commandement of the king yet bad they rather so to aduenture their liues vpon the seas then againe to stay the danger of the Hauen for that the winter did daylie more and more increase so that they were not to looke for any better weather and in that sort appointing themselues as well as they could and taking in all necessarie prouisions the same day they all set saile with no small feare to fall into some misfortune by the way but because many that were of the ship of Malacca stayed at Tercera to saue such goods as by any meanes might be saued and by that meanes to help themselues among the which was the Factor of the pepper béeing one of my acquaintance at whose request as also because the Pepper of that ship and of all the other ships belonged all to one Farmer by whom I was appointed Factor and séeing the necessitie he bad and that he alone could hardly dispatch so great a matter I tooke order for mine owne affaires and hauing dispatched it by other shippes I stayed there to help him till wee had further aduise and order from the Farmers of the Pepper and other spices and wares of the which goods we saued a great quantitie by meanes of Duckers and other Instruments that we vsed hauing aduise from the Farmers the King that it shuld not be long before they sent for vs willing vs to stay there and to looke vnto the goods This staying and fetching vs away continued as I said before for the space of two yeares and a halfe whereby you may consider the good order and pollicie of the Admiraltie of Portingall and with what diligence and care they séeke for the common profit of the land and the poore Marchantes of the Countrie whome they ought to fauor and help as much as possiblie they may but they do cleane contrarie as those which deale in Portingall doe well finde The 13. of August the ships came back againe vnto the Island of Tercera because they had a contrarie wind as also for want of fresh water but they ankered not The day before the Earle of Cumberland with â— or 7. ships of warre sayled by the Iland of Tercera to their great good fortune passed out of sight so that they dispatched themselues in all haste for the more securitie tooke with them 4. hundred Spaniards of those that lay in Garrison in the Island with theÌ„ they sayled towards Lisbon hauing a good wind so that within a 11. dayes after they arriued in the riuer of Lâ—sbone with great gladnes triumph for if they had stayed but one day longer before they had entred the riuer they had all béene taken by Captaine Drake who with 40. ships came before Cascalis at the same time that the Indian ships cast anker in the riuer of Lisbone being garded thither by diuers Gallies Now by the discourse of this long and perilous voiage you may sufficiently perceiue how that onely by the grace and speciall fauour of God the Indian ships doe performe their voiages yet with great miserie paine labour losse and hinderance wherby men may likewise consider the manner of their NauigatioÌ„ ordinances customes and gouernments of their ships so that in coÌ„parison of many other Voyages this present Voyage may be estéemed a happy prosperous voyage for oftentimes it chanceth that but one or two ships of the fiue that yearely saile to India come safe home as of late it hath bin séene some being taken and some lost altogether by their owne follies bad order as herin at large you may perceiue c. The 97. Chapter Of the description of the Islands of Acores of the Flemmish Islands THe Isles of Acores or the Flemmish Islands are â— that is Terceâ—a Saint Michael S. Mary S. George Gratiosa Pico Fayâ—el There are yet two Islands called Flores and Coraâ— which are not contained vnder the name of Acores but yet at this day are vnder the gouernment of the same Islands so that they are in all accounted â— Islands They are called Acores that is to say Sparhaukes or Haukes because that in their first discouerte they found many Sparhaukes in them whereof they hold the name although at this day there is not any there to be found They are also called the Flemmish Islands that is of the Neatherlanders because the first that inhabited the same were Neatherlanders whereof till this time there is a great number and ofspring remaining that in manner and behauiour are altogether like Neatherlanders and there is yet in the same Island a running water that issueth out of a hill so runneth into the sea where as yet those issues or ofspringes of NeatherlaÌ„ders inhabite is called Ariberâ—dos â—ramengos that is the Flemmish riuer The principall Iland of them al is that of Tercera called Iusuâ— de Iesus Câ—stus of Tercera It is betwéene 1â— or â—6 miles in compasse and is altogether a great Cliffe of land whereby in it there is little roome for it is as it were walled round about with Cliffes but where any strand or land is there standeth a sort It hath no Hauens nor entrance of waters for the securitie and safetie of the ships but only before the chiefe towne called Angra where it hath an open Hauen which in forme is like a halfe Moone by the Portingales called Angra whereof the towne hath her name It hath on the one side in manner of an elbow sticking forth two high hilles called Bresyl which stretch into the sea so y t a far off they séeme to bee deuided from the Iland Those hils are very high so that being vpon them a man may see at the least 10 12 and sometimes 15. miles into the sea being cleare weather Vpon these hils there stand two small stone pillers where there is a CeÌ„tinell placed that continually watcheth to 〈◊〉 what ships are at sea and so to aduertise those of the Island for that as many ships as hee séeth coÌ„ming out of the west that is from the Spanish Indies or Brasâ— Câ—bo vâ— Guinea and the Portingal Indies and all other waies lying south or west for euerie ship he setteth a flagge vppon the piller in the west and when the ships which he deserieth are more then 5. then hee setteth vp a great auncient betokening a whole fleet
of our nation doe sayle thether so that euerie Marchant knoweth them This briefe description therfore is by me set town for the instruction of such as deale not in the trade of Marchandise and know them not whereby they may sée what manner of Countries they are c. The 99. Chapter Of cerâ—aine notable and memorable accidents that happened during my continuance in Tercera THe second of October An. 15â—9 at the towne of Villa dan Praya in the Iland of Tercera two men being in a field hard without the towne were killed with lightning The ninth of the same month there arriued in Tercera fourteene shippes that came from the Spanish Indies laden with Cochenile Hides Golde Siluer Pearles and other riche wares They were fiftie in companie when they departed out of the Iland of Hanana whereof in their comming out of the Channell eleauen sunke in the same Channell by soule weather the rest by a storme were scattered and seperated one from the other The next day there came an other ship of the same companie that sayled close vnder the Iland so to get into the Roade where she met with an English shippe that had not aboue three cast peeces and the Spaniyard twelue They fought a long time together which we being in the Iland might stand and behold whereupon the Gouernour of Tercera sent two Boates of Musketiers to help the shippe but before they could come at her the English shippe had shot her vnder water and wee saw her sinke into the Sea with all her sayles vp and not any thing seen of her aboue the water The Englishmen with their Boate saued the Captaine and about thirtie others with him but not one penie worth of the goods and yet in the shippe there was at the least to the value of two hundred thousand Ducats in Golde Siluer and Pearles the rest of the men were drowned which might bee about fiftie persons among the which were some Fryers and women which the Englishmen would not saue Those that they had saued they set on land and then they sayled away The twentie seauenth of the same month the saide fourteene ships hauing refreshed themselues in the Iland departed from Tercera towards Saul â—nd comming vpon the coast of Spaine they were taken by the English ships that laye there to watch for them two onely excepted which escaped away the rest were wholly carried into England About the same time the Earle of Cumberland with one of the Queenes shippes and fiue or sixe more kept about those Ilands and came often times so close vnder the Iland and to the Road of Angra that the people on land might easily tell all his men that hee had a bord and knew such as walked on the Hatches they of the Ilande not once shooting at them although they might easily haue done it for they were within Musket shotte both of the towne and Fort. In these places he continued for the space of two Moneths and sayled round about the Ilands and landed in Gratiosa and Fayael as in the description of those Ilands I haue alreadie declared Here he tooke diuers shippes and Caruels which he sent into England so that those of the Iland durst not once put foorth their heads at the same time about three or foure daies after the Earle of Cumberland had beene in the Iland of Fayael and was departed from thence there arriued in the saide Iland of Fayael â—iâ—e Indian ships whole Generall was one Iuan Doryneâ— there they discharged in the Iland 40. myllions of Gold and Siluer And hauing with all speed refreshed their shippes fearing the comming of the Englishmen they set sayle and arriued safely in Saint Lucas not meeting with the enemie to the great good lucke of the Spaniards and hard fortune of the Englishmen for that within lesse then two daies after the Golde and Siluer was laden againe into the Spanish shippes the Earle of Cumberland sayled againe by that Iland so that it appeared that God would not let them haue it for it they had once had sight thereof without doubt it had beene theirs as the Spaniardes themselues confessed In the Moneth of Nouember there arriued in Tercera two great ships which were the Admirall and Viceadmirall of the Fleete laden with Siluer who with stormie weather were seperated from the Fleete and had beene in great torment and distresse and readie to sinke for they were forced to vse all their Pumps so that they wished a thousand times to haue met with the Englishmen to whom they would willingly haue giuen their Siluer and all that euer they brought with them onely to saue their liues And although the Earle of Cumberland lay still aboute those Ilands yet they met not with him so that after much paine and labour they got into the Road before Angra where with all speed they vnladed and discharged aboue fiue myllions of Siluer all in peeces of 8. and 1â— pound great so that the whole Raye lay couered with plates and Chests of Siluer full of Ryales of eight most wonderful to behold each myllion being 10. hundred thousand Ducats besides Pearles Gold and other stones which were not registred The Admiral and chiefe commaunder of those shippes Fléete called Aluaro Flores de Quiniones was sicke of the Neapolitan disease was broght to land whereof not long after he dyed in Syuilia He brought with him the Kings broad Seale and full authoritie to be Generall and chiefe commaunder vppon the Seas and of all Fléetes or ships and of all places and Ilands or lands wheresoeuer he came wherevpon the gouernor of Tercera did him great honour and betwéen them it was concluded perceiuing the weaknesse of their ships and the daunger of the Englishmen that they would send the ships emptie with Souldiers to conueye them either to Syuil or Lisbone where they could first arriue with aduise vnto his Maiestie of all that had past and that he would giue order to fetch the Siluer with good and safe conuoy Whereupon the saide Aluaro Flores stayed there vnder colour of keeping the Siluer but specially because of his disease and for that they were affraide of the Englishmen This Aluaro Flores had alone for his owne part aboue 50. thousand Ducats in Pearles which hee shewed vnto vs and sought to sell them or barter them with vs for Spices or bils of exchange The said two shippes set sayle with thrée or foure hundred men as well Souldiers as others that came with them out of India and being at Sea had a storme wherewith the Admirall burst and sunke in the Sea and not one man saued The Vice Admirall cut downe her Mast and ranne the ship on ground hard by Sentuual where it burst in péeces some of the men sauing themselues by swimming that brought the newes but the rest were drowned In the same month there came two great ships out of the Spanish Indies and being within halfe a mile of the Road of Tercera they
rich Gentleman in England and had great yearely reuenewes of his owne inheritance but he was a man very vnquiet in his minde and greatly affected to warre in so much as of his owne priuate motion hee offered his seruice to the Queene he had performed many valiant actes and was greatlie feared in these Islands and knowne of euery man but of nature very seuere so that his owne people hated him for his fiercenes and spake verie hardly of him for when they first entred into the Fleete or Armado they had their great sayle in a readinesse and might possiblie enough haue sayled away for it was one of the best ships for sayle in England and the Master perceiuing that the other shippes had left them and followed not after commaÌ„ded the great sayle to be cut that they might make away but Sir Richard Greenefield threatned both him and all the rest that were in the ship that if any man laid hand vppon it he would cause him to be hanged and so by that occasion they were compelled to fight and in the end were taken He was of so hard a complection that as he continued among the Spanish Captaines while they were at dinner or supper with him he would carouse three or foure glasses of wine and in a brauerie take the glasses betweene his teeth and crash them in peeces and swallow them downe so that often times the blood ran out of his mouth without any harme at all vnto him and this was told me by diuers credible persons that many times stoode and behelde him The English men that were left in the ship as the captaine of the souldiers the Master and others were dispersed into diuers of the Spanish ships that had taken the where there had almost a new fight arisen betweene the Biscaines and the Portingales while ech of them would haue the honour to haue first borded her so that there grew a great noise and quarrell among them one taking the chiefe ancient the other the flagge and the Captaine and euerie one held his owne The ships that had borded her were altogether out of order and broken and many of their men hurt whereby they were compelled to come into the Island of Tercera there to repaire themselues where being ariued I my chaÌ„ber fellow to heare some newes went abord on of the ships being a great at Biscaine and one of the twelue Apostles whose Captaine was called Bertandono that had bin Generall of the Biscaynes in the fleete that went for England Hee séeing vs called vs vp into the gallerie where with great curtesie hee receiued vs beeing as then set at dinner with the English Captaine that sate by him and had on a sute of blacke veluet but he could not tell vs any thing for that he could speake no other language but English and Latine which Baâ—tandano also could a little speake The English Captaine got licence of the gouernour that hee might come on land with his weapon by his side and was in our lodging with the Englishman that was kept prisoner in the Iland being of that ship wherof the saylers got away as I said before The Gouernour of Tercera bad him to dinner shewed him great curtesâ—e The Master likewise with licence of Bartandano came on land and was in our lodging and had at the least ten or twelue woundes as well in his head as on his body whereof after that being at sea betwéene Lisbone the Ilands he died The Captaine wrote a letter wherein he declared all the manner of the fight and left it with the English Marchant that lay in our lodging to send it to the Lord Admiral of England This English Captaine comming vnto Lisbone was there well receiued and not any hurt done vnto him but with good conuoy sent to Sentinial from thence sayled into England with all the rest of the Englishmen that were taken prisoners The Spanish armie stated at the Island of 〈◊〉 til the last of September to assemble the rest of the fleet together which in the end were to the number of 14â— saile of ships partly comming from India and partly of the Army being altogether ready vnto saile to 〈◊〉 in good company there sodainely rose so hard and cruell a storme that those of the Island did affirme that in mans memorie there was neuer any such seen or heard of before for it seemed the sea would haue swallowed vp the Islands the water mounting higher than the Cliffes which are so high that it amaseth a man to beholde them but the sea reached aboue them and liuing fishes were throwne vppon the land This storme continued not only a day or two with one wind but seauen or eight dayes continually the wind turning round about in all places of the compasse at the least twice or thrice during that time and all alike with a continuall storme and tempest most terrible to behold euen to vs that were on shore much more then to such as were at sea so that only on the coastes and Cliffes of the Iland of Tercera there were aboue twelue ships cast away and not only vppon the one side but round about it in euery corner wherby nothing els was heard but complayning crying lamenting and telling here is a shippe broken in peeces against the Cliffes there another and all the men drowned so that for the space of 20. dayes after the storme they did nothing els but fish for dead men that continually came driuing on the shore Among the rest was the English ship called the Reuenge that was cast away vpon a Cliffe nere to the Iland of Tercera where it brake in a hundred péeces and sunke to the ground hauing in her â—â— men Gallegos Biscaines and others with some of the captiue Englishmen whereof but one was saued that got vp vpon the Cliffes aliue and had his body and head all wounded and hee being on shore brought vs the newes desiring to be shriuen thervpon presently died The Reuenge had in her diuers faire brasse péeces that were all sunke in the sea which they of the Island were in good hope to waigh vp againe The next summer after among these shippes that were cast away about Tercera was likewise a Flie boat one of those that had bin arested in Portugall to serue the king called the white Doue The Master of her was one Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland and there were in her one hundred souldiers as in euerie one of the rest there was He being ouer ruled by the Captaine that he could not be Master of his owne sayling here and there at the mercie of God as the storme droue him in the end came within the sight of the Island of Tercera which the Spaniards perceiuing thought al their safety only to consist in putting into the road compelling the Master and the Pilot to make towards the Island although the Master refused to doe it saying that they were most sure
to saluation The country is very hot and intemperate for our countrey people specially theâ—r signe which is very hurtful and breedeth much filth and wormes because it is warme and moyst and mother of â—ll corruption whereby springeth many diseases as burning feuers lâ—skes the bloody thâ—â—nd 〈◊〉 like Sailing along the coast they passed by the Island of 〈◊〉 and then vnder S. Thomaâ— line so called because it was first discouered vppon S. Thomas day the Island is in breadth about threescore Italian miles which is twelue of our miles and is in compasse one hundred and foure score miles which are threescore Dutâ—h miles in forme almost round abounding 〈◊〉 sugar and ginger and all kind of 〈◊〉 alles by reaâ— of the came and moâ—â—nes of the dewes which euery morning â—aâ—r the earth as a most soueraigne thing â—o make such fruit increase and growe â—â— From 〈◊〉 southeast and by â—â—st they came before 〈◊〉 or th◠〈…〉 〈◊〉 before the which riuer 〈…〉 three or foure 〈…〉 daungerous 〈…〉 commeth out 〈…〉 with it which make an extreame rough water the riuer is aboue two miles broade with many trees on both the sides but there they found no man to traffike withall wherevpon they sailed further as the wind serued them sometimes close by the â—hoare and sometime further into the sea there the coast lieth north and south and very shalow so that at the least a mile or a mile and a halfe into the sea there is not aboue twelue or thirteene fadomes water and neerer within halfe a mile of the shore foure fiue sixe or seuen fadoms but a man may go neere vnto the shore bicause it is cleere and faire ground to anker in and commonly in the night time they haue the land winde from off the shore which is called Vento 〈…〉 Terra specially being neere a litle further the coast reacheth somewhat more to the west vntill you come to the cape of Lopes Gonsales where thâ—y stayed certaine days to traffike with thâ— country people but not much because the French men had beene there not long before and spoiled the country and during the time of their staying there they obserued many strange customes and maners of that people First concerning their religion they know neither God nor his laws for some of them pray to the sunne to the moone some is certaine trees or to the earth because thâ—y â—â—â—ad vpon it thinking it a gret offence to â—ort â—hereon they go most commonly in the streetes with a great broade naked knife in their handes they are all both men and women pincked and raced on their bodies in diuers maners and very strong to behold which they doe with a knife racing their skinnes then they take a certaine oyntment mixed with some colour which they put into the races they neuer drinke but first they poure some of the drinke out of the pot they drinke not likewise betweene meales but when they haue eaten their meate they drinke a harty draught of water or of their palme tree wine or else of water sodden with honny In the morning and at any other time of the day when they meete any man or reuerence their ruler or gouernour in token of obedience they fall vppon their knees and beate their handes together where they kneele vntill hee clappeth his handes and sometimes they clap handes together one with the other vttering these words Fino Fino Fino wherewith they giue eache other leaue to departe and by the same they signifie and shewe themselues to be friendes The countrey people are much addicted to steale from straungers but not from their owne nation and the women much giuen to lust and vncleanenesse specially with straungers which among them is no shame There are some men that weare round bores about their neckes made of barkes some great some small not much vnlike the bores which with vs are vsed to bee hanged in Innes and Tauernes to putte money in for the poore but they will by no meanes let anie man see what is in them For the most part both men and women goe bare headed with their haire frizeled and folded yet very shorte some weare hartes that commonly are made of barkes of trees or of Indian nuttes some weare plumes or feathers which are made fast to theyr haire with certaine wyars whereof diuerse sorts were brought me from thence some haue hoales in theyr vpper lippes and also through the middle parte of their nose and in the holes in theyr lippes they thrust peeces of bone as broad as a 〈◊〉 with a stalke that passeth through the hole which being thrust in hangeth both before his nose and his mouth some thrust small hornes or teeth through the holes and so weare them all as they think to beautifie themselues some bore a hole in theyr neather lippes and vsually thrust theyr tongues through it manye of them both men and women weare Rings in their eares whereof some are at the least seuen or eight ounces in weight and some haue stickes thrust through their rings that are fiue or sixe fingers long As touching their apparell they haue nothing but a matte made of the barke oâ— a tree dyed redde which they weare before their priuy members ouer some of theyr mattes they weare Apes or sea cattâ—s skinnes or the skinnes of some wilde beasts in the middle whereof there hangeth a bell such as wee hang about the neckes of cowes or sheepe they paint theyr bodies redde with a colour made of redde wood whereof had some brought me from thence it maketh a fayre colour and is somewhat lighter than bâ—astil many times they make one 〈◊〉 red the other white or yellow with a strike or two of the same colour in their faces Most of them weare a gerole or string about theyr middles of buffles skinne with they hayre vpon it which meeteth not together vpon theyr bellies by the breadth of a hand but hath twoo endes sticking or turning vppe and wyth a verâ— small string are made fast about them and before vppon their bellies they weare a short broad Iron knife with a sheathe of the same mettal those girdles some of them are a handful broad some two some three and some broader besides these kniues they vse throwing kniues with three or foure poyntes being verie dangerous whereof I can shew you The women weare great Iron copper or tinne rings about their legges some one others two and some more many of them weying at the least three or foure poundes waight the peece being almost close about their legges whereby a man can hardlie iudge how they gette them on some men likewise vse them but not manie There are also some women that weare aprons before them made of Bresen whereof I can shew you This shal suffice for the description of their apparrell and beautifying of their bodyes which is verie strange and vnseemely no lesse disorder is there in their houses for they liue like beastes and sleep on
yet somewhat colde therein is found much Mather seruing to die wooll cloath and leather it is also ful of thicke woods fishponds and faire Riuers of fresh water also of ponds that naturally are salt water In the woods are many hogges and oxen the riuers do oftentimes cast foorth gold in this Island are sixe townes inhabited by Spaniards whereof the first principal is Saint Iacobs the residence and sea of the Bishop but Hauana is the cheefe towne of marchandize and where all their Shippes are made Twoo principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island the first that therein is a valley situate betweene two hils in length about two or three Spanish miles wherein nature of it selfe bringeth foorth certaine round balles such as by art cannot possibly bee made rounder and in so great aboundance that they may ballist or loade whole Shippes therewith and are vsed in the shippes in steede of Iron or Leaden bulltes The other is a certaine hil not farre from the sea from whence there floweth pitch in great aboundance and runneth unto the sea where it driueth vppon the shore from place to place as the winde and weather serueth This pitch is vsed by the inhabitants and Spaniards to pitch their shippes The people of the Island are like those of Hispaniola onely differing in speech both men and women go naked and kéepe their bridalles in verie strange manner for that he which is married lieth not the first night with his wife be if it be a Lord he biddeth all the Lordes and one of them doth it for him and if it be a Marchant then Marchants take the paines to helpe him but if it be a countreyman either one of the Lordes or the priest doth ease him of a labour They leaue their wiues for verie smal occasions but the women may not forsake their husbands for any cause whatsoeuer The men are very vnchaste and wicked liuers there are great wormes and snakes in the Island and not venimous but easie to be taken the flesh whereof they eate and are neuer hurt therwith which snakes do liue by eating certaine beastes called Guabiniquinazes whereof many times there are seauen or eight found within their mawes they are in greatnesse like Hares in form like fores onely that their feete are like Conies feete the head like a Wesell a Fores taile long haire like a Badger of colour somwhat red the flesh sauorie and holsome This Islande was verie populous but nowe hath verie few onely certain Spaniards the rest beeing almost cleane rooted out and dead for want of meate Iamaica RIght against Cuba lyeth another Island which stil holdeth the name it alwaies had and is called Iamaica and of the Spaniards saint Iacob it lieth betwéene seuentéene and eightéene degrées on this side the Equinoctiall line on the East side it hath Saint Dominico about fiue and twentie miles distant on the West side the Cape or corner of Iucatana on the north Cubam also fiue and twentie miles distant and somewhat more and on the South another smal Island called Lacerana of fiue and twentie miles distant as the rest This Islande was discouered by Christopherus Columbus in his seconde nauigation into those countreyes and was taken by his son Don Diego gouerning the Island Saint Dominico by one Iohan de Squibel a captaine The breadth of the Islande surpasseth the length for it is from East to West about fiftie miles and from north to south twentie miles it is most inhabited by Spaniards the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them like those of Lucaya The middle of the Island hath the longitude of 191. degrees and latitude or height eighteene degrees and is distant from the line seuenteene degrees on the north side It hath a hill that raiseth it on al sides inward to the middle of the land and so proportionably and euen that it can hardly bee descerned it is verie fruitfull both on the sea side and within the land and in times past verie populous such as were very wittie and subtile more then other of the Islanders thereabouts both in wars and other labours There is likewise gold and verie fine cotten wooll and at this present it is ful of beasts brought thither by the Spaniards and there haue increased The swines flesh is better in that Island then in any other place The cheefe towne in this Island is called Hispalis of Siuilia because of the abby which therein is erected the first abbot being Peter Marti◠borne in Milan an excellent learned man and hee that wrote most concerning this Hystorie Hispaniola or Haiti THe seconde great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by the first inhabitants called Quisqueia or Quisquesia and after that Haiti and then Cipanga Haiti is as much to say as roughnesse or sharpnesse and Quisqueia great land Christopherus Columbus called it Hispaniola and now it is called Saint Dominico after the cheefe Towne in the same Island it was discouered in Anno 1493. on the east side thereof lyeth the Island of Saint Iohn and many others on the West Cuba and Iamaica on the north the Island of the Canibals and on the south the firme land which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela or little Venice The cōpasse of this Island is 350. miles Benzo saith 400. French miles which is in a manner al one and it is broader then long for in length it is from East to west 150. miles and from north to south 40. miles the middle of the Island lyeth in the longitude of 300. degrees in latitude 19 in it there are verie many and great hauens as Hatibanico Iuua Ozoma Neyua Nizao Nigua Hayna and Iaques which do al runne into the sea There are others that are smaller as Macorix Ciba◠Cotui wherof Macorix is verie ful of fish the other two abounding in gold In this Island are two very strange lakes the one because of the goodnes and profitablenes therof the other by reason of the strangenesse the one comming out of the hilles from whence the Riuer Puizao hath her issue it profiteth no man onely it giueth a feare and a little sinder sulkes The other of Xaragua is salt although many sweete riuers runne into it and hath many fishes among the which are verie great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen it is hard by the sea and is eleuen miles in compasse the riuer sides and shores were much inhabted except the Saline a verie faire hauen and the Riuer Iaques where there is a great salt hil There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blew colour and much brasill wood cotten wooll but they know not how to make any thing of it amber rich mines of gold and is also fished out of lakes and riuers and likewise siluer and other mettals great abundance of sugar it is verie fruitful ground Reddish Lettice and Coleworts beeing sowed therein are within sixteene dayes after ripe and to bee eaten Melons
to all that countrey This land is great and hath many people and countries vnder it but the principall and chiefe prouince which the Spanyardes holde therein is Mexicana also â—enustiran or Culhuacan as I saide before the other prouinces are Guatimala Xaliscus Hondura Cha'cos Taicâ— Chamoâ—la Claortomaca Huâ—cacholla and the kingdomes of Michuacan Tescuco Utazcalia Tenuacan Maxcalcinco and Mixâ—eâ—apan Mexico or Culhuacan was brought vnder the subiection of the kings of Spaine by Fernando Cortes Merches deila Valo in the yeere of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred and eighteene which countrey is very rich of golde and siluer for that many riuers haue golde in the sand The Sea shore in those Countries yeeldeth manye pearles mustles or oysters wherein they finde the pearles whereof there is a great fishing and much traffike for them There are likewise in this countrey many lakes or meeres that are stil and haue no issue which by the heate of the Sunne tourne into salt There is likewise no lesse aboundance of Cassia Fistulâ— then in Egypt growing on trees with leaues like walnuts and yellow blossoms from whence the pipes or cases of Cassia do issue forth which are vsed to purge in hote feuers to coole and cleanse the gall and heart blood as also very good against the stone in the bladder and kidneys and other diseases There is likewise in that countrie a kinde of fruit that groweth in great abundance called Cacao altogether like an almond which is taken out of the huske and couered with a thinne skinne whereof the kernel is diuided into three or foure partes of a darke yellow with blacke veines being harsh in the mouth and of an euill taste but with them is much esteemed whereof being beaten with some of their countrey pepper they make a certaine drinke which they esteeme of great price giuing it vnto great Lordes and such as are their especiall friends as we esteeme of muscadel or maluesie The sea bordering vpon this countrey as also the riuers running through it are ful of fish wherein also they finde diuers Crocodiles as in Egypt the flesh whereof is so much esteemed before al other meates that they account it for a princely dish whereof some are aboue 20. foote long The country is full of hilles and stony rockes and great difference in their speeche so that they hardly vnderstand each other without Interpreters The places wherein the Spaniardes first placed their men were Compostella where the Bishop and the Kings counsell are resident and Colima which they call the Purification in new Galicia is the chiefe Guadalahara and the head or principall part of the kingdome Mecheocan also a Bishops sea Cacatula the towne of Angels a chiefe towne and bishopricke Mâ—xâ— a kingly citie and Queene of al cities in the new world lyeth vpon the border or side of a lake the market place of the Towne lying ful vpon the lake whereby they can not come at it but they must passe ouer bridges This lake is lâ—â—t and is in length sixe lucas or twelue miles and is in breadth tenne miles without fish onely a smal kind that may rather be called wormes than fishes from the which lake in summer time there ariseth such a stiâ—ke and infecteth the ayre in such manner that it is vnwholesome to dwel there notwithstanding it is inhabited by as many marchants as any towne in Europe the cittie is great at the least three miles in compasse wherein are so many temples that it is incredible the particularitte whereof before it be long shal be translated out of Spanish into our mother tongue by the author therof whereunto I referre you Not farre from this cittie lieth an other fresh lake very ful of fish whereon as also vpon the shore lie many townes When this towne was first taken by the Spaniards there raigned a king called Mâ—ntezâ—mâ— being the ninth in degree and as then the towne was but 140. yeares old which is to bee wondered at howe it is possible that so great a citie in so few yeers should be so famous The marchandises that are most carried out of this countrey are golde siluer pearle balsam cochenilia the white roote Macheocan which is good to purge Salla Pariglia and an other roote which maketh men sweate brimstone beasts skinnes and fish And thus much for new Spaine in generall and of Mexico in particular Not minding at this present time to make any longer discourse because that our Carde sheweth little thereof and now returning to our owne Carde you must vnderstand that the lower ende of Cuba hath an out Hooke called P. de Santa Anthonio which is very fitte for to take in fresh water and to calke and mend the shippes Sailing from this hooke sixtie fiue miles to the firme land you come to the hooke of Iucatan which runneth into the sea like a halfe Island Iectetan is in Indian speech I vnderstand you not for that vpon a time when certaine Spaniards put out of the hauen of Saint Anthony to discouer newe countries and arriued in that Island they made signes vnto the people to knowe the name of the country whereuppon the Indians answered them and saide O Tectetan Tectetan that is We vnderstand ye not and so the Spaniards corrupting the name Tectetan call that land Iucatan yet the furthest point therof in their spéech was called â—ecampi This point of Iucatan lyeth vnder 21. degrees vnder the which name a great countrey is comprehended by some called Peinsula that is a place almost compassed about with water for that the further this point reacheth into the sea the broader it is being in the narrowest part 80. or 90. Spanish miles broad for so farre it is from Xicalanco Therefore the sea Cardes that place this land nearer or smaller do erre much for that it is in length from East to West twoo hundred miles being discouered by Francisco Hernandez of Cordua in the yeare of our Lord 1517. but not al of it for that sailing from out of Cuba from Saint Iacobs to discouer new countries or as some say to fetch labourers to trauell in his mines he came about the Island Guanaxos herein called Caguan xâ— to the cape di Honduras where good honest ciuill and simple people dwelt being fishermen hauing no weapons nor vsed to the warres and proceeding further sayled to an vnknowne point of land where hee found certaine salt pannes whereunto he gaue the name of Donne that is women for that there were certaine stone towers with staires chappels couered with wood and straw wherein were placed diuerse Idols that shewed like women whereat the Spaniardes maruelled to finde stone houses which till then they had not seene and that the inhabitants were rich and well apparelled with shirtes and mantles of cotten white and coloured with plumes of feathers and iewels of precious stones sette in golde and siluer their women likewise appareled from the middle downewardes as also on the head and breast which
and therefore needelesse to rehearse Returning againe to the lake of Nicaragua therein are great fishes and amongest the rest a certaine kinde of fish in Spanish called Manâ— hauing finnes hard by their heades like two hands this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foote long and twelue foote thicke the head and tayle like an oxe small eies hard and hairie skinne of colour light blew with two feete like elophantes feete the sinnes standing out like Kopen feeding their yong ones with their dugges This fish feedeth both on land and in the water they are very familiar with men whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing which is that there was a king called Caâ—aâ—amavuis that had taken a yoong Mâ—nate which for the space of six and twenty yeres he kept and broght vp with bread in a lake called Guamabo that bordered vpon his house which fish in time became so tame that he surpassed the dolphin wherof we reade so many histories for that at what time soeuer the kings seruants called him Matto Matto which in Indian spéech is Manisecale or curteous hee would presently come out of the lake and eate meate out of their handes and woulde likewise come out of the water and goe into the house to fetch his meate and there woulde play with the children and when any man was desirous to go ouer the lake he would oftentimes take eight or tenne of them together and swimming beare them lightly on his backe ouer the water in which manner playing with him the Indians kept this fish long time til by some iniury done vnto him he became angry for that vppon a time as a Spaniard would prooue if his skinne were as hard as they reported it to be threw an arrow or dart at him and although it hurt him not yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow and from that time perceiuing that men with beards and in apparel were there they might wel call him but al in vaine for he would neuer come vp againe but in the end when the riuer Aâ—bunicus chaunced to flowe so high that it ranne ouer the bankes and so into the lake Guaniabo the fish folowed the streame and swamme into the sea these kindes of fishes are much seene and taken in that countrey for that their flesh is of a very good taste like hogs flesh which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios and other places The lake of Nicaragua lyeth not farre from the south sea and about a hundred miles from the north sea running through a riuer that is ful of ships which the Spaniardes called Desaguadera that is falling of water therein Thereabouts in that riuer there are many crocadiles that lay their egges vpon the sands on the riuers sides as bigge as geese egs which being throwne against a stone wil bruised but not breake and in time of hunger are eaten by the spaniards their taste is like a Moschuâ— halfe rotten and by the Indians is accounted for an excellent kinde of meate by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharpe because of the thicke woodes and vneuen hilles where not onely horses but men can hardly passe ouer vnlesse it be with great paine and labour about this countrey for the space of foure months there are certaine Torteâ—ux that doe continue in the sea as also vppon the shoare which lay their egges as the crocadiles doe in the sand vppon the shoare whereof presently by reason of the great heate of the sunne there commeth yoong Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh is wholesome and pleasant to eate From Cabo de Gratias a dios to the Rio Grande or Desaguadera as I said before are seuenty miles from Desaguadera to Corobaro are fortie miles from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fiftie miles betwéene Corobaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua and the riuer Swerus these 90. miles lie vnder nine degrees and ½ so that from the poynt of Iucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500. miles As touching the maners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the riuer Swerus dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest onely that they eate no mans flesh in their countrey are many beares tigers and lions that are very fearfull and flee when they see a man there are likewise very great snakes but not venomous and many sea cats there is likewise an other kinde of beast called Cascui in a manner like a blacke pigge hairie with a hard skinne smal eies open eares like an elephant but not ful so open nor hanging down clouen feet and a litle snowt armed like an elephant and of so shril a voyce that it maketh men deafe and is of a good and sauory flesh There is likewise an other wonderful and straunge beast of Gesnerus called a Foxe apâ— on the belly whereof Nature hath formed an other belly wherein when it goeth into any place it hideth her young ones and so beareth them about her This beast hath a body and member like a foxe feete like mens hands or like sea cattes feete eares like a batte it is neuer seene that this beast letteth her yong ones come foorth but when they sucke or ease themselues but are alwayes therein vntil they can gette their own meate also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or Iuanna not much vnlike our eftes hauing a thing hanging at his chinne like vnto a beard and on her head a combe like a cockes combe vpon his backe certaine sharpe quilles sticking vpright like thornes and amongest the rest some hauing teeth like a sawe with a sharp taile and stretching out sometimes winding like the adder This beast is accounted among the vnhurtfull snakes euery time it layeth it hath fortie or fiftie egs round and as big as a nut whereof the yellow is seperated from the white like hennes egs they are good to eate and very sauory flesh but not roasted either in oyle or butter onely in water this beast feedeth both on land and in the water it climeth trees and is fearful to behold specially to those that knowe not the nature thereof yet it is so gentle quiet that it maketh not any noyse and being taken and bound it liueth at the least tenne or twelue dayes without meate it is of a good and sauoury flesh and is kept for likorishnesse specially the women onely such as haue had the pox if they eate it their paine reneweth Nombre de Dios. NOmbre de Dios is a towne of traffike lying on the north sea so named by Diego de Niquesa a Spaniard that had indured some hard fortune and landing in that hauen with the rest of his men saide â—n Nombre de Dios that is in the name of God and so began his worke againe which before he did pretend and there erected certaine houses giuing the place the name aforesaid this towne lieth east and west vpon the sea side in the middle of a very
water wherein they stay the gold which is in great grains it was discouered by Roderigo de Bastidas in the yeere of our Lord 1502. And within two yeares after by Giouanni de la Cosa And then againe in the yeare of our Lorde 1509. by Don Ancisus and after him followed Alonso de Hoieda who desiring to discouer their sands or barter with the inhabitants as also to learne their speech and to know the riches of the country sought to come acquainted with them but the Indians withstoode them and determined to fight wherewith the Spaniardes shewed signes of peace causing an interpreter that Franciscus Pizairo had brought from Vraua to speake vnto them saying that hée and his companions the Spaniards were christians peaceable and quiet people and such as hauing by long voyages passed the great Ocean seas had as then need of all necessary prouisions and of golde desiring them to barter the same with them for other costly wares which they had neuer seene Wherevnto the Cariben of Zenu answered them that it might well be they were such quiet people but yet they shewed not the signs of peace and therefore they willed them presently to departe out of their countrey for they saide they were not minded to be mocked by them neither meant they to indure an enemies or straungers weapon within their country Wherevpon D. Ancisus replying answered them and saide that he could not with honour depart from thence before he hadde deliuered his message vnto them for the which he was sent thither making a long oration thereby to perswade them to the christian faith grounded onely vpon one God maker of heauen and earth and of all creatures therein in the end telling them that the holy Father the Pope of Rome Christs lieutenant throughout al the world hauing absolute power ouer mens soules religion had giuen their countrey to the mighty king of Spaine his master that he was purposely sent thither to take possession thereof wishing them therefore not to oppose themselues agenst him if they meant to become christians and subiects to so great a Prince onelie paying a small yeerely tribute of golde Whereunto they in iesting manner and smiling aunswered much after the same manner as it is written of Attabalipa that they liked well of his proposition touching one only God but as then they were not minded to argue therof neyther yet to leaue their religion that the Pope might well bee liberall of other mens goods that belonged not to him or at least that he should giue that which was in his power to deliuer as also that the king of Spaine was either very poore to desire that which was none of his or very bold to seeke that which he knew not and that if he came to inuade their countrey they would set his head vpon a stake as they had done manie other enemies his like but the Spaniardes not esteeming their words entred vpon the land and ouercame them From the gulfe Vraba to Carthagena are 70. miles betweene the which two places the hauens and riuers aforesaide do lie the partition being passed ouer as also Puerto de Naos that is the hauen of Ships it is from Carthagena to S. Martha fiftie miles Carthagena CArthagena was so named because that in the mouth of the hauen there lieth an Island in Indian speech called Codego as also new Carthago in Spaine Scombria or els bicause al the Spaniards dwelling therin came out of the Cittie of Carthago in Spaine the Island is about two miles long and a mile broad When the Spanyardes came first into that countrey they found it ful of Fishermen whereof at this time they can hardly find any remnant which is not to be wondered at for that not onely in this prouince but in al the other Islands wherin the Spaniards haue béene there is hardly any Indians left because the Indians as long as possibl they might wold neuer haue any dealings with the Spaniardes because of their tyranny This Countrey is rich of fish fruites and all kinde of victualles necessary for men they couer their priuy members with clothes of cotten wooll both men and women go to the wars for in the yeere of our Lorde 1509. as a Spaniard called Martinus Amisus made warre vppon those of Zenu bordering vpon Carthegena hee tooke an Indian woman of the age of twenty yeeres that with her owne hands hadde slaine 28. Christians their arrowes are poysoned and they eate their â—nueâ—â—tes flesh and spoiled many Spanyards at their feasts which in times past they vsed to hold they beautifie their bodies in the best maner they can deuise with iewells and golden bracelets mingled with pearles and stones called smaragdes wearing them about their faces armes legges and other parts of their bodies their chiefe merchandises are salt fish and pepper which groweth in great abundance all along the coast it is of forme long and sharper than the â—st Indian pepper and much sweeter and pleasanter of smell than the common Braâ—ilia pepper which wares they carrie into such places as want it where they barter for other things before they were vnder the subiection of the Spaniards they had many kindes of fruites and trees cotten wooll feathers golde bracelets gold many pearles smaragdes slaues and diuers rootes wherwith they traffiked bartering them without any respect desire or couetousnes vsing these wordes Take this and giue me some other ware for it but no ware was more esteemed with them than victualles but now they likewise beginne to couet after golde and other thinges whiche they haue learned of the Spaniards Benzo in his second booke of the Indian historie and fift chapter sheweth a notable example saying that vpon a time he being very hungry went into an Indians house praying him to sel him a chickin and the Indian askt him what hee would giue him he pulling foorth a spanish riall of siluer gaue it him which the Indian taking helde betweene his teeth and saide Then I perceue you would haue my victualles and giue mee that which no man can eate neither is it of any account therefore take you your peece of siluer and I wil keep my victualls Betweene Carthagena and saint Martha there runneth a great swift riuer called Rio Grande which standeth in our Carde which issueth with such force into the Sea specially in winter that it beats the stream of the sea backe againe whereby the shipps that passe by it may easily take in water Sayling vpwardes into this riuer to the kingdome of Bogota by the Spaniards called Granada there are certaine mines of emeraldes found in the valley of Tunia in this Carde called Tomana whereabouts the spaniards haue builded new Carthage The inhabitantes of the valley of Tunia and the people bordering on the same doe worship the sunne for their chife god with such reuerence that they dare not stare or once looke stedfastly vpon it they likewise worship the Moone but not so much as the
manners and customes in planting hunting c. Besides this these people take great pleasure in twoo things that is dancing and drinking often times spending eight dayes together in banquetting dancing and drinking themselues drunke besides their ordinarie dancings and meeting together at the feasts and coronations of their Kings and Lordes or in common assemblies and publike bankets many of them meete together euerie one drest in a seueral maner some with crowns of feathers others with shelles or fruits about their legges like Iuglers heere in our countrey vsing al kinds of toyes and deuices some straight others crooked some backwards some forwards grinning laughing counterfetting the deafe blind and lame man fishing weauing and doing al kinde of workes and that for the space of fiue or sixe howres together for that hee which continueth longest in that manner is the best man and he that drinketh wel is a lustie fellow hauing danced they sitte down crosse legged like a Taylor and make good cheare drinking themselues drunke at the kings charges of which their dancing I haue spoken in another place so that to speake any more thereof it were needlesse They are great Idolaters praying to the Sunne and the Moone thinking them to bee man and wife and to be great Gods They feare the Sunne verie much when it thundereth or lightneth saying that it is angry with them they fast when there is any eclipse of the Moone specially the women for the married women plucke theyr haires and scratch their faces with theyr nailes thâ— maides thrust thornes of fishes into their armes and therwith draw bloud thinking that when the Moone is in the full they thinke it is to be shot or hurt by the sunne by reason of some anger or greefe he hath conceiued against it when any blazing star appeereth they make a great noise with Drummes and hallowing thinking by that meanes it will bee gone for they thinke a blazing starre signifieth some great hurt or euill fortune Among many Idols and figures which they honour and inuoke for Gods they haue a certaine thing like a Burguinion Crosse which they hang vpon their new borne children thinking thereby they are preserued in the night from all euill things Their priests are called Pâ—aces who in those countries haue the maiden-heades of their Daughters when they marrie Their office likewise is to heale the sicke and to say truth to call vppon the the diuel and to conclude they are skilful in the blacke art and coniurers They heale with hearbes and rootes both sodden and raw beaten and miâ—â—ed with fat of birdes fish or beasts with wood and other things vnknowne to the simple men vsing certain darke wordes and sentences which they themselues do not vnderstand They sucke and sicke the place where the paineâ—s therby to draw out the euil humours and if the paine or feuer increaseth the priests say that their patients are possessed with euil spirits wherewith they rubbe their bodyes all ouer with their handes vsing certaine wordes of coniuracion and charmes sucking after that very hard often making them beleeue that by that meanes they cal the spirit which done they take a certaine wood wherof no man knoweth the vertue but onely themselues wherewith they rub their mouthes and throats so long vntil they cast al whatsoâ—uâ—r they haue within their stomackes and with so great force that ofteÌ„ times they cast forth bloud mean time stamping stammering calling and knocking with theyr feete against the earth with a thousande other toyes needlesse to rehearse Cubâ—gua or Margaritha CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearles and is in compasse three miles lying vnder twelue degrees and a halfe vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line foure miles from the point 〈◊〉 a countâ—â— wherein there is much salt although the grounde is both flat and euen yet it is vnfruitfull and drie both without water and trees and wherein there is little els found then onely Comes and some Sea foules The inhabitants paint theyr bodies they eate the oysters wherein the Pearles are founde and fetch all their fresh water from the firme land giuing pearles for it there is not any Island in the world so smal as it is that hath raised so much profit and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich as this hath doone for that the pearles which in few yeares hath bin brought from thence doe amount vnto aboue two millions of gold although thereby many Spaniards and slaues haue lost their liues From the point â— Arya to the Cape de Salines that is to the poynte of the Salt pans are seuentie miles between them lyeth Caâ—be and the Cape de tres Puntas which is the Cape of three poynts from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado that is the drowned hauen are more then seuentie miles and the ceast running along by the gulfe of Paâ—a the lande maketh with the Island Trinidad Paria IN the mouth of the gulfe of Paria lyeth the Island la Trinidad taking the name from a certaine promise made by Columbus in his second voyage in An. 1497. being in danger or because he first perceiued three hilles seeking for fresh water his people in a maner dying with thirst The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis y t is the Dragons mouth because of the great streame that runneth therein The whole countrey and shore of Paria stretching towardes the South is the goodliest country in all India and the fruitfullest as Benzo and Columbus both doe witnesse so that by some it is called the earthly Paradice it is a great flatte and euen land ouerflowing and aboundant of all things alwaies bring forth flowers of sweete and vnsweete sauour The trees continually greene as it were in May or lent but not many fruitfull or wholsome trees and in some places thereof is great aboundance of Cassia Fistula the whole countrey is generally hot and moist whereby there are diuers wormes among the which are many Mytes which by night fall verie heauily vpon the people and many grashoppers that doo much hurt the inhabitants beare there members in a goord or reede as it were in a sheath letting their stones hang out before the Spaniards came into the countrey they wore such kind of codpeeces bordered with gold pearles and such like things which custome the Spaniards made them to leaue the marrted women couer their secret parts with an apron by them called Pampanillas and the maides tie a peece of cotten before their bellies their kings haue as many wiues as they will yet one of them is accounted for the right Queene and hath commandement ouer all the rest the common people haue three or foure as they think good and when they are olde they put them away and take yong for them They likewise let theyr Piacchos or priests he with their gentlewomen and their maids the first night of the marriage This people as also most part of the Indians maintaine themselues
small vnhabited Islandes called Maghensis full of birdes which are so tame that meÌ„ take them with their hands and kil them with staues From thence you go to Cape Frio a verie good hauen well knowne by meanes of the French traffike whereabouts the â—ouâ—upâ—nambauâ—â— friendes to the Frenchmen doo inhabite about this Cape are many great whales in Latine called Prestis and in Duch Sword-fishes yet they are no sword fishes for that their Iawes are full of teeth like Sawes There are likewise on this Cape manie Parrats in as great aboundance as crowes with vs about this Cape lyeth the creeke by the Barbarians called Ganabara and by the Portingales Rio de Ganeâ—râ— because it was discouered in the first moneth of the yeare and the Bayaseâ—moza this creeke is wel knowne to the Frenchmen because they traffike thither and therin had made a fort it lyeth vnder three twentie degrees on the South side of the Equinoctial line right vnder Tropicus Capricorâ— it is in the entrie sixe Spanish miles broad and further in but three or foure miles broad and there lyeth smaller hils then at the entrie The mouth of this creeke is verie dangerous for that if you leaue the sea you must saile by three vnhabited Islandes where it is great fortune but the ships doo strike in peeces vppon the rocks and cliffes you must likewise passe before a pointe not aboue three hundred paces broade which hangeth from a high hil hauing the form of a Piramides which not onely seemeth verie great but far off shewing as if it were made by mans art which by reason of the roundnesse as also because it is like a tower is by the Frenchmen called le pot de Buere that is the Butter potte a little further in the creeke is an euen rock about a hundred and twenty paces great by the Frenchmen called Râ—tier or Mouse fall to which Villagagno at his first arriuall brought all his necessaries and prouision thinking thereon to build a fort but the waues droue him backe againe about halfe a mile further lieth the Islande wherein the Frenchmen did dwell which before their arriuall was not inhabited and is in compasse about a thousand paces yet the breadth is six times more then the length all compassed about with cliffes as also with water in such sort that the shippes cannot come at it but with great danger onely in one place and that with small boates whereby it appeareth that this Island by reason of the situation is very strong on both sides of this Island there standeth a little hill whereupon the Gouernour had made his house and on a Rocke about fiftie or sixtie foote high in the middle of the Islande hee had placed his Court or Castle called Coligni in honour of the Admirall of France that had sent him thither In other plaine fieldes about the same were the rest of the Frenchmens houses made rounde and couered with leaues or boughes being in all about eighty men 10000. paces or two Spanish miles and ½ further from this Island lyeth another verie fruitfull Island in compasse about thrée French miles called the great Island inhabited by Tououpinambaâ—â—iâ—s great friends to the Frenchmen to whome they oftentimes went to fetch meale and other necessaries there are likewise in this creeke many other small and vnhabited Islandes where there are many good oysters the Barbarians diue vnder the water with theyr hands bring vp certaine great stones whereat there hangeth great numbers of Oysters and so fast cleued to the stone that they can hardly gette them off verie good to eate some of them hauing small Pearles within them they are by the Barbarians called Leripes This water is ful of strange fishes specially Barbels and Sea Swine there are likewise whales with verie fatte and thicke skinnes there runneth likewise into this creeke out of the middle part of the land two fresh riuers vppon both the sides whereof lyeth many villages of the Barbarians tenne or fiftéene miles further along the coast towards the riuer de Plata or the straights of Magellana there is another great creeke by the Frenchmen called Vasarum whereunto they vse to saile as they do to the other which they first took in Hereafter followeth the manner and customes of the people THe Toupinambaultii are not much vnlike our people well proportioned of bodie and limbe but stronger and healthsomer then wee and lesse subiect vnto sicknes among them are found fewe lame cripples blinde or mishapen men although there are of them that liue to the age of an hundred and twenty yeares accounting their yeares by the Moones fewe of them likewise hauing gray haires which is a certaine signe of the temperatenes of that land as hauing no extream cold nor excessiue heate hauing greene trées hearbes and fields al the yeare through and because they liue without care they shew alwaies of one age for they haue no hurtful poyson nor foule water to drink whereby all diseases do grow they haue likewise no passions or afflictions of minde in their countreyes which mooue vexe and consume both the spirits and bodyes as not knowing of any fauours couetous desires chidings hate or enuie which but to our shame consumeth the Christians As touching the colour of their bodyes they are not altogether blacke but browne like the Spaniards because of the heate of the sim they go al naked as they came out of theyr mothers wombes not once shaming therat vnlesse it be at bankets or when they goe to warres there are some of them that bind two great leaues together therewith to couer theyr priuie members not so much for their credite but because they haue either some deformity or else disease therin which oftentimes happeneth among them they are not rough nor hairie as some men describe them for they suffer no haire to hang vpon theyr bodyes for that as soone as they perceiue it they plucke it foorth either with theyr nayles or sheeres which they haue either of the Frenchmen or the Portingales which they pull not onely from their chins but also from their eye browes eye liddes which maketh them for the most part seeme feareful and vgly The hinder part of theyr heades is couered with haire the young boyes vntil they come to mans state we are theyr haire from the crowne of the head downe to theyr neckes but al theyr foreheades shauen as if it were a Friers crowne on the hinder part of their heades they let the haire grow after the manner of our auncestors which were all shorne only in their necks and that was rounded They haue likewise for a custome that they bore holdes in their boyes vnderlippes wherein they stick sharp bones as white as Iuorie which they take out and put in as often as they wil and being older they take away the bones and in steed thereof weare greene Iaspis stones being a kinde of bastard Emerauld inwardly flat with a thick ende because they shall not fall out
where they keepe their cattell their douehouses vineyards but no good grapes because of the grounde gardens of pleasure not onely full of all those countrie fruits but also of Spanish fruites as figges poundgarnats lemons oranges melons beanes pease and sugar canes all verie good and sauorie and better then in Spaine and to say the truth to passe a mans life in quietnesse were it not for the reporte that runneth of the Spaniards that they make warre against those people without a cause I thinke it the best and most pleasant place in all the world the aire being so temperate that all the yeare long there is no extremitie either of heate or cold and it was neuer heard that euer they had famine plague or any raine thunder or lightning but to the contrarie alwayes a cleare and faire skie it was builded by the Admirall Don Francisco Pizarro in the yeare of our Lord 1535. and was called 〈◊〉 Kings towne because they arriued therein vpon twelfe day by vs so called Touching victualles besides fish which they haue both out of the sea and the Riuer in great aboundance as also flesh and fruits of trees and of the earth as I saide before they haue no lesse quantitie of wheate and the foure moneths of summer in Spaine are winter with them onely somewhat colder then the summer in those soure moneths of winter there falleth euerie day in the forenoone a small dew or mist but not vnholsome as with vs for that those that haue any paine in their heades washing their heades therewith it healeth the ach it is verie likelie that this towne of Lima will daily increase in people and houses for many yeares together there were not aboue 500. houses therein yet the place is great inough to containe 2000. houses for the streetes are verie broade and the market as bigge as a great fielde euerie house is eightie foote broade and a hundred and sixtie foote long and because there is no conuenient woodde whereof to make chambers for that al their wood within two or three yeares is cleane consumed by wormes therefore the houses be but of one storie high yet verie costly and sumptuous with many chambers halles and parlers both fitte to dwell in and also to receiue strangers the walles of the houses are made of a certaine stuffe baked hard together and filled with earth They couer their houses with painted mattes or else with painted linnen and round about and aboue vppon the walles they make arbours of greene boughes wherein they sit to keepe themselues from the sunne for raine they neede not care for there it neuer raineth this Citie hath vnder it al these townes hereafter named where there are Bishops as Quito Cusco Guamanga Arequipa Pax Pâ—ata Trugillo Guanuco Chachapoâ—a Portus Vetus Guaiaquil Popatan Carchi Saint Michael and S. Francis Before it was saide that Peru is diuided into three prouinces in flat or plaine land on the sea coast in hillie lande that runneth through the middle of Peru in other lands lying beyonde the hilles touching the flat lande on the sea shore I haue hitherto spoken beginning from the line and the Cape Pasâ—ao hitherto so you must vnderstand that from Tumbez not onelie to Lima but also further southward the sea coast is full of many great droughts and wilde sandie places where for the space often miles it neuer thundereth lightneth nor raineth but beyonde that or all the space that is betweene those tenne miles and the hilles it thundereth lightneth and raigneth In this flatte land there are no fountaines nor welles but foure or fiue standing waters that are brackish because they are neare the sea the inhabitants vse the riuer waters that run out of the hilles which spring of the snow and raine that falleth on the hilles and not out of fountaines that stande among the hils The distance of these riuers are alreadie partly described lying seuen eight ten twelue fifteene and twentie miles one from the other yet most part seueÌ„ or eight wherby such as trauaile direct their course because they haue no other waters on both sides of these riuers about a mile broade or further and sometimes more or lesse according to the scituation of the countrey are diuers fruitfull trees and corne landes which are planted and sowed by the people of the countrey which they may do all the yeare long also there groweth about those riuers many wilde trees cotten reeds thistles and Lâ—s and since the Spaniards subdued the countrey they sowe wheate moystning the lande by certaine channels made out of the Riuers and because they runne with so great force out of the high hilles that without helpe men can hardly passe them and many are drowned such as trauaile in that flat countrey go so neare to the sea coast that they haue them alwayes in their sight when it is winter in the hilles and that it raineth much it is dangerous trauailing in those countries specially to passe the riuers which they must either do vpon drifts which they haue for the purpose or with a net which they fil with canworden or goords whereupon the trauailer must lie and one of the Indians swimmeth before him drawing the net or drift and an other behinde that steereth it The people in the flat land dwell in houses made of boughes the men weare shirts and cloathes vppon their knees and ouer it they cast an vpper garment or mantle the women weare a kinde of cotten pettiecoate from the head to the foot and although their manner of apparrel is in euerie place almost alike yet they vse certain differences in the attiring of their heades some wearing nothing but plaine hairelaces some double and wreathed others of one colour and some of diuers colours and there is no man but he weareth some thing vppon his head and all different according to the manner of the country Those Peruuians of the plaine countrie are diuided into three manner of people-ech hauing a different name wherof the first are called Iungas those are such as dwell in the hot country the second Tallanes and the third Mochicas ech hauing a seuerall speech only that the Lordes could speake the Cuscan speech as our Courtiers speake French the cause thereof is that their Kinges helde it for a dishonour vnto them to speake to their subiects by an interpreter for the which cause Guaynacapa father to Atabaleba commanded that all the ble men of the countrey shoulde send theyr children to his Court vnder pretence as he saide to serue him to learne that speech although his intent was none such but onely thereby to assure himselfe of his kingdome against such as might rise vp against him which they would not do he hauing theyr children in his power and by this same meanes al the noble men learned the speech commonly vsed in the Court wherewith a man may trauaile cleane through the countrie Of the windes that blow in the plain countrie of Peru also the
some narrower accounting the length from Quito to the towne Delia Platta in this country of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles wherein men cannot inhabite the first parte of the hilles are called Andes which are full of great Woods the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in which likewise were not inhabited but beyonde the hilles the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes which are verie colde and are great snow hilles so that there also no man can dwell because of the great colde and aboundance of snow which maketh the ground so soft that nothing can grow therin The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru from Tumbez to Tarapaca where it is so hot that neither water trées grasse nor any liuing creature is seene thereon but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them Nowe Peru beeing so long and scituate in this manner there are many wilde and desart places not inhabited for the causes before rehearsed and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales that by reason of the hils are throwded and defended from the windes and snow wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful so that whatsoeuer is plaÌ„ted therein yéeldeth fruit most aboundantly the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils are wiser stronger and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast and apter to gouerne and for pollicy they dwel in houses made of stone whereof some are couered with earth others with strawe because of the raine whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side haue no care at all couering theyr houses thereby to keepe them from the sun with painted mattes or boughs of trees out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles there runneth many streames of good water into the south sea and moysten the plain countrey of Peru causing many fruitfull Trees corne and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein as I haue already declared Of the people and countries that are therein lieing from Pasto to Quito THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris which is in the land of Quillacinga people without shame and good manners as also they of Pasto little esteemed by their neighbours trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde although they are so neere vnto the line but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way which is no lesse to be wondred at then the way that Hannibal made through the Alpes whereof hereafter I will speak also you passe hard by a riuer vpon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge by nature so artificially made that arte coulde not possibly mend it it is of a high and thick rock in the midle whereof there is a hole through the which with great fury the streame passeth and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it this rocke in their speech is called Luâ—â—châ—ca that is a stone bridge about that place is a fountaine of warme water wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes although the countrie about it and also the riuer are verie colde whereby it is hard trauailing by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle therin to keepe garrison but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs and blacke by them called Mortunnos whereof if any man eateth they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twentie houres From this small countrye of Guaca you come to â—usa where y e prouince of Pasâ—o endeth not farre from thence you come to a little hill wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira where it is very hot an there are many kinds of fruits and certaine faire melons good connies turtle doues and partriges great aboundance of corne barley and maiz from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue before you come thither you must first passe ouer a lake in India called Aguarcocia in our speech the opeÌ„ sea because Guianacapa king of Peru at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled destroyed them all because they had displeased him and threw their bodies into that lake making the water red with their blood The houses of CaraÌ„gue are in a little place wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru all made of stone and also a Temple of the same wherein there was alone 200. maides that serued the temple and are verie narrowly looked vnto that they commit no vncleanes if they did they were cruelly punished and hanged or buried quicke with them also were certaine priests y t offered sacrifices and offerings according to their religious manner This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account being then very carefully looked vnto and greatly honoured wherein was many golde and siluer vessels iewels and treasure the walls being couered with plates of golde and siluer and although it is cleane destroyed yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue with their Captaines who both in time of peace and warre continued there to punish offenders Departing from the houses of Carangue you come to Oâ—aballo which is also rich and mightie and from thence to Cosesqui and before you come thither you must passe certaine snowie hills where it is so colde that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba which is three miles from Quito and because the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line therefore it is there very hot yet not so hot that men cannot dwell therein or that it hindereth the fruitfulnes thereof by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter in some places colde and in some places hot as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people and there many fruites and seeds do grow In this way you passe
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
Ilandes ly the aforesaid sand drougthes wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them for they are dangerous There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa towardes Mosambique which euerie springtide is couered with the sea hauing other sandes round about it that are alwaies couered with the sea therefore I wish you to take héed of them you may from thence runne along the shore where it is déepe water from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mosambique there is a haueÌ„ called Os Coaraias that is the Corales from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif which is very dangerous and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it wherefore you must take héed vnto it for many shippes haue striken vpon it and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it when you passe it you must put 3 miles from it into y e séa North east northeast by East being by night but by day you may sayl w t more securitie and looke about you yet nothing going neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte and following your course North east you shall come right vpon the Ilands of Mosambique if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land til you be at 15 fadome and there you may anker for it is good grouÌ„d yet but in few places only vnder the point of Musicatte at 20 fadome and more you shall haue faire ground the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west being 18 miles distant from theÌ„ce to Mosambique you runne North east along the coast the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes Northeast South west and some what North east and by East and South west and by West the land of the Ilandes Premeiras on the side of Mosambique lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ you runne along by those Ilands and sands East and West and East by North and West by south and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse within a length of a great shot of the Ilands yet bee not abashed but beware of the outside which is full of stones and other filth whereby no meanes you can anker as being nothing but wood stonâ— if you chance to be in the middle way betwéene the Ilands the drougths with an East wind then you must passe in out betweene the first Iland the drougth which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras on the side of Soâ—â—ala as also from the third Iland towardes Mosambique running along the West side at 7.10 12 fadome déepe the other drougthes lie in the middle way vnder the stone cliffes therefore you néed not feare them but betwéene the Iland from the trees that are vpon the East side you can by no meanes passe for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras and Northeast and south west with the first Iland 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe hoth in leÌ„gth breadth the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras lieth the Riuer Quilimani where the Coast reacheth East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani which you must take héed of for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea and if you find your self inwards from Cauo das Correntes you may at all times anker for it is good ground because you are vpon the banks and haue no cause to feare because the wind blowing from the land wil alwaies helpe you whereby you may put into the sea as you thinke good The 11. Chapter The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala HE that desireth to sayle from India to Poâ—to Piqueno or the small hauen lying in BeÌ„gala I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill holding his course along the shore to a place called Briniao which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast southwestward from thence holding his course south till he be vnder 6 degrées ¾ and from thence South east to 5 degrées and â…” and being ther he must runne East till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla that is the poynt of the Galley is the farthest land from thence lying in the south vnder 6 degrees therefore if you hold your course East till you be vnder 5 degrees and â…” you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon this way and course you must alwaies hold setting out of Cochâ—â— from the 10. of Aprill to the 20. of the same as I sayd before for yf you depart later from thence you must stay longer because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest and Northwest blowing verie strong and blustering wheÌ„ you sée the Iland Seylon you shall sayle along the coast East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr ½ 7 miles distant one from the other in the same course of East and West and East and by North and West and by south from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth are almost 28 miles Beeing 10 or 15 myles beyond the drougthes you shall sayle Northeast till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½ from thence running North whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land about tenne or twelue myles from the land called O pagode de Iorganatte that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte which is a verie good course for this voyage when you perceiue this land which hath certaine high Hilles you shall see some round Houels that are rounder and higher then the Hilles standing vppon them called Palur by the which you shall passe along Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and Southwest and by south vntill you come to the thinne and low land and passing by it you shall come to a Riuer which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand and an other plaine with a houell hauing on the one side somewhat
further in the shew of an other thicke Houell with trées and kéeping on your course til you come right ouer against y e riuer theÌ„ the houels séem to be right ouer against the other thicke laÌ„d it sheweth thus when you are about a myle ½ to the sea ward from it froÌ„ this riuer to the first Pagode or Idole there is about three or foure myles and from this Pagode forward you finde no more high hils like that you haue past before and passing straight from thence some of them shew as if they had tables or plaines vpoÌ„ them this Pagode lieth ful vnder 20 degr your best way is alwaies to looke out for it as being requisite for you thereby to make a good voiage beyoÌ„d this first Pagode there staÌ„deth an other Pagode as great as the first with 2 or 3 small Pagodes standing somewhat further from y e first Pagode to y e secoÌ„d is about 4 miles and the coast from the one to the other lyeth East and West here you must not kéepe too close to the shore for you shall hardly put off again because it maketh a créeke likewise before you come to the first Pagode you must kéepe off from the land because two miles before you come at it there lyeth a small drougth stretching a mile into the Sea From the first Pagode to the seconde you sée certaine houels and trées and from the second Pagode to Sataguan it is a lower land all waste and wilde ground being altogether bare to the point called a Punta das Palmerias that is the point of the Palme trees and you run West along the coast from the Pagode aforesaid to a point with a Riffe lying 12. miles from the point of Palmerias there lyeth a riuer the point aforesaide reacheth a great halfe mile into the Sea you runne along the coast Northeast and from the aforesaid Riffe point to the Palmerias the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and to knowe the Riffe and the lande thereof you must vnderstand that the land of the Riffe is greater and thicker then the other land of the Cliffe and maketh show of an Iland and presently somwhat further you shall see nine or ten trees shewing like round houels from the Pagode to this Riffe are about 12. miles from thence forward you shall runne along the coast at nine ten fadome deepe vntill you come to the said Palmerias whereof the fore part of the land is verie low hauing a bare houel which sheweth it selfe like the Arenas Gordas or redde Downes lying by Saint Lucas de Barameda in the coast of Spaine froÌ„ this donne or houel to the Palmerias it is altogether a low and bare land without any trees or bushes the Palmerias were wont to be ten or twelue Palme trees now there is but one hard by the same Palmerias on the side of Sataguan there stande certaine Houels and from thence forwards you haue no pointes hookes trees nor any more bushes but the land for a mile way is nothing but like a Riffe And when you see the point of Palmerias then you shall holde your course East vntill you bee 12. Fadome deepe and from thence Northeast till you find eight Fadome and a halfe and being in the daye time you shall presently see land which shal be beneath all the Riffes and if the land be couered with any dampes or mistes you shall then not see it before you bee at 4. fadome deepe This course you shall hold with a Compasse that faileth not for if it doth you must make your reckening thereafter this land whereby you shall passe is a flat low land without either bush or tree and passing forward along the coast you shall vpon the East side perceiue a long blacke Houel like a Champana without a Mast which is an Indian Caruell and somewhat further from this Houell there are a companie of trées which are about thrée or foure that shew greater then the houell these trees stand somewhat low and a little from these trees beginneth the Riffe of the countrie of Orixa which hauing seene you shal presently see the water to Seaward breake which is vpon the drougthes of Bengalen for there the Chanell is smalest and behind you leaue many Riffes on the side of Bengalen which doe all lie to Sea ward wherefore you cannot see them and passing by them you approach the Riffe of the land of Orixa for although you sayle close by you neede not feare other then that you see before your eyes the depth is three Fadome with small blacke Sand in the bottome On Bengalen side you shall haue foure or fiue fadome water with muddie grounde on the which side you must not goe for that beyond that muddie ground you should come to a banke of Saâ—â— comming from Bengalen when you find this ground you shall if néed be come Northeast and by North vntil you be at thrée fadome for this is the right way the aforesaid Riffe of Orixa being past you shall presently find more depth and if you desire to runne along by the land of Orixa then set your course right vpon the first point that you sée before you the least depth you shall find is thrée fadome which is the right way vntill you be close by the land where you shal find 5. or 6. fadome déepe and if you néede any wood to burne then goe on the other side of the land of Bengalen for there the wood is better then on the side of Orixa but hauing done you must again put to the side of Orixa vntill you bee past two ryuers lying on the same side of Orixa whereof the first is liker a Créeke then a ryuer the other lyeth about a mile further in which hath a great mouth or entrie two or thrée miles further beyond that Riuer there are some flowing Beken with trees a mile beyond them there is woode or wildernesse full of thicke trees like Palme trees from the beginning whereof you must crosse ouer to the other side of the land called Guinette right vppon a tree standing on the same side which is higher then all the rest and standeth on the left side of the riuer called Chandecan from thence forwarde it is all shallowes wherefore you must passe further therabouts with a ful sea if you desire to passe through the channell of the land you shall take your course as I said before from Palmieras to the Northeast you may runne at fiue fadome and being by day you shall runne at thrée fadomes and running at this depth along by the land although you come sometime to lesse depth yet you néede not feare with the which course you shall sée the Riffe of Orixa and when you sée it you shal make towardes it and make 2 â— parts of the way towards the land and a third part towards the Riffe and so you haue the right way as aforesaid The 12. Chapter An other description of the
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
better assured you may send a boat in before you which shall lie there where y e riuer is narrowest thereby to serue you for a Baye or Sea-marke The 38. Chapter The right course to saile from the Island Meaxuma to the Hauen of Cochinochy and to Facunda with the scituation of the Places WHen you sée the Island Meaxuma go within a mile and a halfe or two miles néere it or somewhat closer if you will for there you néed feare nothing but what you sée before you and desiring to saile from thence to Cochinochy then you shall hold your course East and East and by North stil kéeping Eastward whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima and if it bée by night and that you desire to knowe when you are by the land then cast your Lead continually out and béeing at fortie fadome then you are about two miles and a halfe or thrée miles from the lande and béeing in the mouth of the Créeke you shall finde hard and great Sand and when you are at fortie fadome you may anker if the weather be faire if you thinke it bée falling water and so stay till it bée daye for there the streame runneth verie strong into the Sea your Lead will direct you what you shall doe If it bée day you shall presently sée the Lande of Cabexuma to Seawarde from you lyeth a Cliffe which sheweth like a Saile This Cliffe you can not sée but when you are close by the point to Léewarde from this point Northward lyeth certaine stonie cliffes but it is not best for you that you sée them when you goe to Cochinochy because they lie to Lée-warde as I saide before And wen you sée lande which is at fortie fadome water then you shall presently discouer the Créeke of Arima as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side and the lande of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side which is very high This lande lyeth on the South side and Cabexuma on the North side when you sée the point of Cabexuma goe within a mile of it because of a stonie cliffe which lyeth in the mouth of the Creeke holding your course close by Cabexuma about a mile and a halfe from it or along by the land of Amacusa If the winde within this Créeke bée sharpe then stay vntill the floode commeth which shall bring you where you desire to be and being there you haue Cochinochy right before you where you shall haue Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in Hée that desireth to goe to Facunda must hold his course East Northeast and Northeast and by east and when you are close by the land you shall find the depths aforesaid and beeing to Léewarde from Cabexuma you shall there finde harde ground and if it be right ouer against the mouth of the creeke you shall haue sandie ground as aforesaid and when you see the point of Cabexuma then make towards the lande and by the lande about a mile distant you shall sée certaine stonie cliffes by the which you shall holde your course to Seaward from them by these first stonie cliffes lyeth a round Island with a trée in it and somewhat beyond this Island with one Trée there is another Island stretching Northwest and Southeast called Ilha dos Cauallos that is the Island of Horses you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lyeth out on the North side of the same Island This Island on the Northwest side hath for a marke certaine Pine trées when you are close by the aforesaid Northerly point then from thence hold East Northeast till you put in where you shall find a Creeke and right ouer against this Island North Northeast lieth a sharpe pointed Houell reaching to Seawarde which you must shun for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones which you shall presently see when you enter into the creeke going within an Island or cliffe which will be East Northeast from you you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great péece and so runne along by it till you be in and within on the right hand vpon the lande you shall sée certaine downes and on the left hand a groue hauing on the sea side as you passe along many stones like Kefell stones Right ouer against this Island on the left hand lie the two stones aforesaid which you can not see then with an ebbe of a spring tide and running in after this manner you shall see a crosse standing vpon a point of land and right ouer against this crosse is the Rode and from this crosse Eastward there is a verie good Hauen where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side that is the Hauen of Facunda The 39. Chapter An instruction of the course out of the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache to the cape de Sumber in the coast of China where the Portingales are resident SAiling out of the hauen of Langâ—saque to China hauing a North wind if you haue cause to anker below by the thrée Islands or cliffes béeing right ouer against the Island dos Cauallos on the side of Facunda then anker there along for it is déepe enough all ouer as I with my lead haue prooued there you shall stay the first night that in the morning very early you may haue the winde from off the lande wherewith you shall set saile loosing as much as you can vntill you be gotten about the Island dos Cauallos for because we did it not being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga we were in danger not to haue béene able to get about the Island Béeing past the Island dos Cauallos you must hold your course West West and by South and West Southwest and if the wind be bigge then put not towards the Island Guoto for that there at that time you haue certaine South windes which I knowe for certaine because I haue béen there at other times in the ship of Manoel Trauassos in great trouble because it is crosse wind right vpoÌ„ the coast and there you haue no ground as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas which are called Pottes and by some Cliffes wherefore your best course is to runne to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma Along by the Southwest side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliffe from thence forwarde you shall holde your course West Southwest although you haue the wind scant yet you may hold that course for that being halfe way from the gulfe to the coast you shall without doubt finde the wind large enough In this way kéeping well to Loofewarde about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor you shall find a Banke of 35.37 and 38. fadome déepe which by such as knewe it not might bee taken for the ground of the land of China Being past this Banke you find more depthes but when after that the depthes begin to lessen then looke to your selfe for
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
in great danger The 45. Chapter Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca IN the entry of the Hauen of Patane lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca to the Island of Bintao which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoctiall line the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December From the Island Pulo Condor lying right against the hauen and land of Camboia to the Island Pulo Timao lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca at such time as you come froÌ„ China holding your course halfe a strike from the south the streams run towards the Island Borneo and being halfe a strike Southwestward then the streames run towards the coast of Pan which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca From Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Sesir lying right against the coast of Camboia the streames run Eastward and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China the streames runne to the coast of Champa and from the Falce Varella which is distant from the right Varella fiftéen miles lying on the coast of Camboia y e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast which is at the end of Iuly and in the month of August In the Monson of the South windes when you saile from Mallacca to China the streames from the Gulfe of Pulo Catao and the Island Aynao runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina vntill the last of December and from Ianuary forward then the streams in that Gulfe and countrey runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa in Camboia from the other side and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward the stronger they run towards the sands In the Monson of China when you saile from China to Mallacca then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao to y e Island Puto Cambir both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa It happeneth oftentimes that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea and then you haue the Terreinhos which are Windes blowing from the land out of the West and northwest and the Viracoins which are winds that come from the Sea out of the East Southeast and east Northeast being in the North they presently change into the south whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come again and thus they hold about two miles from the coast and not further for they are winds that do only blow vpon y e coast as in other places it is already sufficiently declared in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins When you saile by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo towards the land of Bungo in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma From 30 degrées Northward a little further theÌ„ to the middle way to Iapon the streames from that country to the coast of China run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn in the monson of the south and southwest winds In this monson of South and Southwest winds the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao The 46. Chapter Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone in the haueÌ„ of Macau in China with the height of the same Hauen found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China within the hauen of Macau it being Full Moone and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the morning which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne which as then was about 13. degrées from the line and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées 1 â— and as then I likewise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock the moone being thrée daies old in such sort that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2 â— in the morning which I also tried by the new Moone The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau it being then full moone and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at noâ—ne the moone being foure dayes old so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning béeing new moone but these Tides of China fall not out iustly vnlesse it be foure daies before and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone for then there is as much water as vpon the third day which I affirme to be most true because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so The cause is for that before it it is all Islands and Channels so that when the waters beginne to fall they ebbe not aboue thrée houres but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course The 47. Chapter Of the signes and tokens of the tides waters and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest windes it is most certaine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon that when the winds of the monson blow and from thence run into the East that they turne not againe out of the East into the south but from thence into the North and hauing continued there for a certaine time they turne againe into the east and from thence into the South if it be a Northeast wind then it turneth often times into the Southwest and not into the East but not often but the surest is as aforesaid It changeth also often times from North to South and not into the East which is very common and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carnation cloudes about it and that many beames issueth from the Sunne in such manner that it séemeth to blaze then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone if it sheweth in the like maner it is a signe of stormes and tempests When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere that you may in a manner sée into it and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof then it signifieth good weather The like doth it signifie in the setting of
them passing forward with it on their course the Captaine sayling along the shore with his Pinnace and the Shippe keeping about a myle from him to Seaward to séeke for a shippe whereof they had intelligence and hauing in that manner sailed about fiue and forty myles they found the shippe that lay at anker in a hauen who about two houres before had beene aduertised of an English Pirate or Sea-rouer and had discharged eight hundred Bharres of siluer out of her and hidden it on the Land which siluer belonged to the King of Spaine of the which siluer the Englishmen had receiued some intelligence but they durst not goe on land because there were many Indians and Spaniards that stood to guard it and they found nothing in the ship but thrée Pipes of water the shippe they tooke with them and being about a mile in the Sea they hoised vp all her sailes let her driue doing the like with the Shippe that they had taken in Azijcka as also the other of Saint Iago which likewise they let driue following on their course with their owne ship and the Pinnace Being seuen or eight myles from the Hauen of Callan de Lyma they espied thrée Shippes and boording one of them they tooke thrée men out of her and so helde on their course towards Callan de Lyma where they entred being about two or thrée houres within night sayling in betwéene all the shippes that lay there being seuentéene in number and being among the ships they asked for the ship that had laden the siluer but wheÌ„ answere was made them that the siluer was laid on land they cut the cables of the ships and the masts of two of the greatest ships and so left them At the same time there arriued a Shippe from Panama laden with wares and Marchaundise of Spaigne that ankered close by the English Ship which was while the English Captaine sought in the other Shippes for the siluer As soone as the shippe of Panama had ankered there came a Boat from the shoare to search it but because it was in the night they let it alone till morning and comming to the English shippe they asked what shippe it was wherevpon one of the Spanish prisoners by the English Captaines commandement answered and said it was the shippe of Michiel Angelo that came from Chile which they of the boat hearing sent a man on boord who climbing vp light vpon one of the great Péeces wherewith hee was afraid and presently stept backe againe into the boate because the Shippes that lay there and that sayled in those Countries vsed to carry no great shotte and therewith they were abashed and made from it which the shippe of Panama hearing that was newely come in shee iudged it to bée a Rouer and therewith cutting her Cables shée put to Sea which the Englishmen perceiuing shipped certaine men in their Pinnace and followed her and being hard by her they baddde her strike which they of the shippe refused to doe and with a Harquebush shotte killed one of the Englishmen wherewith they turned againe into their shippe and presently set sayle following after the shippe which not long after they ouertooke which they of the Shippe perceiuing hoised out their Boate and leaping into it rowed to Land leauing the shippe with all the goods which the Englishmen presentlie tooke and with her sayled on their course The next day they sawe a boat with sayles making towards them whereby they presentlie mistrusted it to bee a Spye and not long after they perceaued two great shippes comming towards them which made the English thinke they came to fight with them wherevpon they let the Shippe of Panama driue therein leauing Iohn de Greicke With the two that they had taken the same day they entred into Callan de Lyma as I said before and presently hoised all their sailes and sailed forward not once setting eye againe vpon the aforesaid shippes for they made towards the shippe of Panama which the Englishmen let driue From thence they sayled againe along the coast following on their course and hauing sailed certaine dayes they met a Frigate that went towards Lyma laden with wares and Marchandises of the Countrey from whence the Englishmen tooke a Lampe and a Fountaine of siluer and asked the Pilote being a Spaniard if they met not with a Shippe that they vnderstoode should bee laden with siluer but the one Pilote said he met her not and the other said hee sawe her about thrée dayes before This Frigate came not to the shippe but to the Pinnace wherein the Captaine sayled for the Pinnace ranne close by the shoare and the shippe kept a myle and a halfe from the Lande wherewith they let the Frigate goe following on their course Two dayes after they came to the Hauen called Payta where they found a Shippe laden with Spanish wares which the Pinnace boorded and tooke it without any resistance for as soone as the Spaniards perceaued the Englishmen they presently made to Land with their Boat and two of them leapt into the Sea none staying in the shippe but the Maister Pilote and some Moores out of the which shippe the Englishmen tooke the Pilote and all the Bread Hens and a Hogge and so sayled forward with the Shippe but being about two Harquebush shotte to Seaward they let it goe againe not taking any thing out of it and asking after the shippe which they sought for they told them that about two daies before shee departed from that place wherewith they followed on their course and before night they met with a Shippe of Panama which they presently boorded but tooke nothing from her but onely a Moore and so left it holding on their course The next day being the first of February they met another Shippe that sayled to Panama laden with Fish and other victuals fortie Bharres of siluer and some golde but I knowe not howe much which they tooke and sent the passengers with two Friers that were in her in a boat to Land The next day they hanged a man of the Shippe because hee would not confesse two plates of golde that hée had taken which after they found about him which done they let the Shippe driue following on their course The first of March towards noone they espied the shippe laden with the siluer béeing about foure myles to Seaward from them and because the English Shippe was somewhat heauy before whereby it sayled not as they would haue it they tooke a company of Bottigas or Spanish Pots for Oyle and filling them with water hung them by ropes at the sterne of the Shippe to make her sayle the better and the shippe that sayled towards Panama made towards the English Shippe to knowe what she was thinking it to bee one of the shippes that vsed to saile along the coasts and to traâ—ficke in the country and being hard by her the English Captaine bad them strike but the other refusing to doe it with a great Peece
much different and from the matter taken in hand Touching the orientall parts neuerthelesse because it is vnknowne to our countrimen as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe it will not bee out of the matter but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto and as I thinke will bee wel accepted and esteemed off insomuch as that at this time our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and trauell into those countries hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their trauels to the honour praise and glory of the Gospell of Christ and all Christian Princes and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries The 65. Chapter The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata with the situation thereof SAyling from Cabo Verde that is the greene point to Brasilia you must saile south southeast Southeast and Southeast by South and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées or wheresoeuer you bee you shall take your degrées on the Southside and lessen them as much as you can and you must remember that as soone as you haue the generall winde blowing from the South-east then you shall runne Southwest and West Southwest and if the winde bee South and Southwest you must runne South-east but not too farre for it helpeth you not for that the more you kéepe that course the more way you loose and you shall vse all the meanes you can not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes called Os Baixos de Sant Anna for the winde will helpe you in such manner that you may sayle towards the Point of Brasilia And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco It being from the Moneth of October forward and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha being vnder eight eight degrées and ½ You must runne West towards the Lande and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side from whence you shall put to the South that is from October forward for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe and if you bee vnder the degrées aforesaid you shall see the said downes and when you see the end of them on the South-side and from thence not séeing any more then you are by Capigâ—aramirini and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles And so if you bee vnder eight degrées and a halfe then you shall sée a flat Lande till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare which is called Capiragua when you are East and West with this Lande being the Countrey whereof I speake at twelue fadome déepe it beeing in the Moneths of October or after Februarye then you néede not feare any thing but take héed you put not southwards for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d Olynda where the Towne of Olynda lieth and the coast of the same North Point is sailed North and South If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine then you shall sée a Hill inward to the land which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell on the Southside hauing thrée Houels along by the Sea side and the coast will stretch North-east and Southwest From this point of S. Augustine to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½ and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and â…“ Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées this voyage is thus to bee sayled when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember But when you saile from Lisbon in February or March then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées for from y e month of March forward then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow and if you chance to bee by the land vnder the height aforesaid you néede not feare any thing but shall hold your course at seuentéene and eightéene fadome for it is faire and cléere and you haue nothing daungerous but the riffes lying close by the land whereon you sée the water breake running Northward if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side then feare not to run northward for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine This point lieth on the sea side being euen stéepe land shewing like the muzzell of a Whale in the toppe hauing a round Hill compassed with Trées and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus From this Island to Cape S. Augustine are fiue or sixe miles and lyeth vnder 8 degrées ¾ The 57. chapter The course and Nauigation to the Hauen called A Bahia de todos os Santos or of all Saints in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos that is the bay of all Saints then obserue the course aforesaied taking the times of the yeare From the Month of March forward and from October as I said before This Bay of all Saints lyeth vnder thirteene degrées and being from October forward then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½ and being in sight thereof which will bee white sandy strands which shew like linnen that lieth too white then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast vntill you be at the end of the said strands where you shall sée an Island lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen called Tapoon From thence you runne along the coast West and West and South And comming to this Bay from the Month of March forward then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1 â— Southward and when you are in sight of Land if it be not the aforesaid white strand then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½ Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside and if you chance to be so néere the lande that you can find no meanes to get off from it then you shall know the Land well for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel called O Morro de san Paulo from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles along by this houell on the northwest side there is a very great riuer called Tinhare which is very good to put into if néed be and is six and seuen fadome déep and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées ½ then put not to the Lande for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous And if you desire to saile from the Bay of
all Saints to Pernanbuco or to Portingale then hold your course Eastward and if the wind serue you hold East and East and by North for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées for if you be vnder 11 degrées you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Barâ—ys that is the Créeke of emptying of vessels and likewise when you come from Portingall hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées then put not towards it to shorten your way but rather holde your course Southward from it From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas or the riuer of Islands the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast and Southwest and by West and Northeast and by East The 58. Chapter The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the riuer of the Islands you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾ séeking to finde them from the moneth of March forward then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½ and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2 â— you néede not feare and séeing the land vnder these degrées then you shall see certaine high hilles called As Serras dos Aymores when you sée those hilles then you shall come along the coast Northwarde not fearing any thing for from thence Northward there are no shallows As soone as you sée the Ilands for there are no other then on the same coast you shall sée a rouÌ„d hill standing along by the Sea side on the North side whereof you put into the Riuer and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands kéeping from them and there by the said Islandes you may anker and if you be in that country when the Northeast winds doe blow then looke for land vnder 14. degrées and if you see a flat land then it is the Island called Camamuâ— by the which you shall run southward and being at the end of the flatte land then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid all along by the sea side In the place where this lande beginneth to shew high there lieth a small riuer called Rio das Contas that is the riuer of Beads but it is not to be entered and hath a white harde stone for a marke From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward and comming where the aforesaid high land endeth then you shall finde a great Créeke and being West Southwest you shall see another high land at the foot whereof which is almost in the middle way to the créeke you shall see certaine white houses which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared and being there you shal presently see the Islands The 59. chapter How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro that is the sure Hauen lying in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro in the time of the Southeast windes which is in March and so forward you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées ½ for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea and when you saile East West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times being by the land that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point which is called Monte Pasqual froÌ„ thence you shall run Northward west the same hill is westward from you then you must hold towards the land yet with good regard and foresight And when you sée the land and that you perceiue a round Houell then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro and running along by the coast aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro This height is a white stonie rocke and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally when you are East and west with this stonie rocke then Northward you shall sée the water breake which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Seguro If you begin this voyage when the winds are northeast come to 15. degrees and â…” not seeing any hills then leaue not running along the coast when you are vnder 15. degrées the first high land you shall sée will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast if vnder that height you see a riuer then make not towardes the land for there it hath certaine dangerous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea then you shall passe by it kéeping to seaward from it and when you are at the end thereof then the towne will be Westward from you you may well put to it alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands lying by the riuer called Rio Grande that is the great Riuer and when you are past Rio Grande then make towards the land againe to know it as aforesaid The 60. Chapter How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia dâ— Espirito Santo that is the Bay of the Holy Ghost lying in the coast of Brasilia SAiling to the hauen of Spirito Santo béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos vnder 19. degrées and ½ then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées for in this coast you haue no monsons or courses of certaine winds If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½ and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo which is the land lying aboue Criquare and aboue y e riuer called Rio Dolce that is the riuer of Swéet or fresh water you shall holde your course along by the land vntill the land beginneth to rise hauing some Hilles but trust not to the first that you shall sée but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro And when you come to this Hill on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos that is the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen and on the South side then the mouth of the Baye will presently